USER MANUAL

MV-1640IP
MV-3240
MV-3240IP
Multi Viewer

6th Edition - Rev. 2

Edition Revision History
Edit. Rev. Date Description Section
1 - 2021/02/26
2 - 2021/05/21 Supported ST-2022 1-1, others
Supported 50Hz output
2 1 2021/07/21 Supported for redundant external control 9-1
commands
3 - 2022/01/11 Changed to a common operation manual with
MV-3240
4 - 2022/07/08 Supported 12G/6G-SDI input.
Supported ST2110 (uncompressed video/audio).
5 - 2024/01/12 Title display changed to 4 lines. 6-6-1-6. and
Added Tally Frame Overlap Mode and others. others
6 - 2025/02/28 Changed to a common operation manual with
MV-3240IP
6 1 2025/04/18 Added SNMP Trap On/Off description. Appendix 6
6 2 2025/06/13 Added port number for Ember+. 9
Recommended cable length is specified in the Specs
HDMI output columns.

2
Precautions
Important Safety Warnings
[Power]

Operate unit only at the specified supply voltage.

Caution

Disconnect the power cord via the power plug only. Do not pull on the cable portion.

Do not place or drop heavy or sharp-edged objects on the power cord. A damaged
cord can cause fire or electrical shock hazards. Regularly check the power cord for
Stop excessive wear or damage to avoid possible fire / electrical hazards.

Ensure the power cord is firmly plugged into the AC outlet.

Caution

[Grounding]

Ensure the unit is properly grounded at all times to prevent electrical shock.
Caution

Do not ground the unit to gas lines, units, or fixtures of an explosive or dangerous
nature.
Hazard

[Operation]

Do not operate the unit under hazardous or potentially explosive atmospheric

conditions. Doing so could result in fire, explosion, or other hazardous results.
Hazard

Do not allow liquids, metal pieces, or other foreign materials to enter the unit. Doing
so could result in fire, other hazards, or a unit malfunction.
Hazard
If a foreign material does enter the unit, turn the power off and immediately disconnect
the power cord. Remove the material and contact an authorized service representative
if damage has occurred.

[Transportation]
Handle with care to avoid impact shock during transit, which may cause malfunction.
When you need to transport the unit, use the original or suitable alternative packing
Hazard material.

3
[Circuitry Access]
Do not remove covers, panels, casing, or access the circuitry with power applied to
the unit. Turn the power off and disconnect the power cord prior to removal. Internal
servicing / adjustment of unit should only be performed by qualified personnel.
Do not touch any parts / circuitry with a high heat factor.
Capacitors can retain enough electric charge to cause mild to serious shock, even after
the power has been disconnected. Capacitors associated with the power supply are
Stop especially hazardous.

Unit should not be operated or stored with cover, panels, and / or casing removed.
Operating the unit with circuitry exposed could result in electric shock / fire hazards or
Hazard a unit malfunction.

[Potential Hazards]
If abnormal odors or noises are noticed coming from the unit, immediately turn the
power off and disconnect the power cord to avoid potentially hazardous conditions. If
problems similar to the above occur, contact an authorized service representative
Caution before attempting to operate the unit again.

[Rack Mount Brackets, Ground Terminal, and Rubber Feet]

To rack-mount or ground the unit, or to install rubber feet, do not use screws or
materials other than those supplied. Doing so may cause damage to the internal
circuits or components of the unit. If you remove the rubber feet that are attached to
Caution the unit, do not reinsert the screws that secure the rubber feet.

[Consumables]
Consumable items that are used in the unit must be periodically replaced. For further
details on which parts are consumables and when they should be replaced, refer to
the specifications at the end of the User Manual. Since the service life of the
consumables varies greatly depending on the environment in which they are used,
Caution such items should be replaced at an early date. For details on replacing consumable
items, contact your dealer.

4
Software License Agreement
This Software License Agreement is a legally binding Agreement between you (“User”) and FOR-A Company
Limited (“Company”). The software, user manual and all other associated documentation (collectively, “Product”)
are licensed, not sold, to User. By installing and using the software, or by using a product of the Company in which
the software is installed, User agrees to be bound by all terms and conditions of this Agreement, as set forth below.
1. Grant of License
a. Subject to User’s compliance with this Agreement, the Company grants User a non-exclusive and
limited license to operate the Product in the manner specified in the user manual and other associated
documentation. User may not use the Product in any manner other than that specified.
b. The Company only grants User a license to personally use the Product, and does not allow User to
transfer the license to any third party or to enable any third party to use the Product.
c. The software may only be used on a single computer or device.
d. While the software may include various programs, they may not be unbundled or used as standalone
programs.
2. Restrictions on Distribution, Duplication, Leasing and/or Transfer of Product
User may not, without the Company’s prior written permission, distribute via communication lines, or
lease or transfer the Product and/or electronic copies of the Product, in whole or in part, nor attempt to
do so.
3. NO WARRANTY
USER EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT IS AT USER’S
SOLE RISK. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LOCAL LAW MANDATELY APPLICABLE,
THE PRODUCT PROVIDED BY THE COMPANY IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH
ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND THE COMPANY, ITS AFFILIATE
COMPANIES, THEIR DISTRIBUTORS AND THE COMPANY’S PROGRAM LICENSORS HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED,
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF LACK OF VIRUS, OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND OF
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR
ADVICE GIVEN BY THE COMPANY SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE PRODUCT
PROVE DEFECTIVE, USER ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR, OR CORRECTION.
[Link] of Liability
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LOCAL LAW MANDATELY APPLICABLE, IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COMPANY, ITS AFFILIATE COMPANIES, THEIR DISTRIBUTORS OR ITS PROGRAM
LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR ANY OTHER
COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE USER’S USE OF
OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF
LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IFTHE COMPANY, ITS AFFILIATE
COMPANIES, THEIR DISTRIBUTORS AND ITS PROGRAM LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
5. Termination of Agreement
a. The Company may immediately terminate this Agreement if User fails to comply with any of the terms
and conditions of this Agreement.
b. User may terminate this Agreement by written notice to the Company under the following
circumstances.
(1) User waives the license hereunder.
(2) User destroys or loses the Product and prevents the Company from being able to confirm its
existence.
c. After termination of this Agreement, User may not use the Product in any way, shape or form.
6. Ownership
The Company and its program licensors retain all copyrights and intellectual property rights of the
Product. The Company and its program licensors may update the Product from time to time at their sole
discretion without notice to User. In no event shall the Company or its program licensors have any
obligation to make available the updates to User. In no event shall this Agreement be deemed to assign
any copyright and/or any intellectual property rights of the Company or its program licensors. User may
not modify any program included in this software, nor disassemble, decompile, or reverse-engineer a
program to analyze its source code.

5
7. Applicable laws
This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of Japan. The
Company’s rights hereunder shall be protected under all applicable laws including without limitation the
copyright laws and treaties in Japan and by laws and international treaties relating to intellectual property
rights. User must comply with all copyright laws as well as applicable laws and regulations when using
the Product.
8. Jurisdiction
Any dispute relating to this Agreement shall be subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Tokyo District
Court of Japan as the court of first instance.
9. Severability
In the event that any part or parts of this Agreement shall be held illegal or null and void by any court or
administrative body of competent jurisdiction, such determination shall not affect the remaining parts of
this Agreement and they shall remain in full force and effect as if such part or parts determined illegal or
void had not been included.
10. Export control
User may not use or otherwise export or re-export the Product except as authorized by the laws of the
jurisdiction in which the Product was obtained and United States law. In particular, but without limitation,
the Product may not be exported or re-exported (a) into any U.S.-embargoed countries or (b) to anyone
on the U.S. Treasury Department's Specially Designated Nationals List or the U.S. Department of
Commerce Denied Persons List or Entity List. By using the Product, User represent and warrant that
User are not located in any such country or on any such list. User also agree that User will not use these
products for any purposes prohibited by United States law, including, without limitation, the development,
design, manufacture, or production of nuclear, missile, or chemical or biological weapons.

6
Upon Receipt
MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP units and their accessories are fully inspected and adjusted prior to
shipment. Check your received items against the packing lists below. Check to ensure no damage has
occurred during shipment. If damage has occurred, or items are missing, inform your supplier
immediately.

◆ MV-1640IP
ITEM QTY REMARKS

MV-1640IP 1

AC Cord 1 set AC cord clamp included

(See next page for installation instructions)

EIA Rack Mount Brackets 1 set

Rubber Feet 4

HDMI Cable Lacing Bracket 1 set (See next page for installation instructions)

CD-ROM 1 Installation disc. User manual (PDF) included

Option
MV-1640PS Redundant power supply

MV-1640IF Interface option

MV-1640SDI SDI16 input card

MV-1640SDI-12G Software for supporting 12G/6G-SDI input (for MV-1640SDI)

SFP transceivers (SFP28, up to 4) used for IP video transmission should be prepared by users.
Recommended SFP transceiver module: MMA2P00-AS-SP (NVIDIA)

◆ MV-3240
ITEM QTY REMARKS

MV-3240 1

AC Cord 1 set AC cord clamp included (See next page for installation
instructions)

EIA Rack Mount Brackets 1 set

Rubber Feet 4

HDMI Cable Lacing Bracket 1 set (See next page for installation instructions)

CD-ROM 1 Installation disc. User manual (PDF) included

Option
MV-1640PS Redundant power supply

MV-1640IF Interface option

MV-1640SDI-12G Software for supporting 12G/6G-SDI input

7
◆ MV-3240IP
ITEM QTY REMARKS

MV-3240IP 1

AC Cord 1 set AC cord clamp included (See next page for installation
instructions)

EIA Rack Mount Brackets 1 set

Rubber Feet 4

HDMI Cable Lacing Bracket 1 set (See next page for installation instructions)

CD-ROM 1 Installation disc. User manual (PDF) included

Option
MV-1640PS Redundant power supply

MV-1640IF Interface option

SFP transceivers (SFP28, up to 8) used for IP video transmission should be prepared by users.
Recommended SFP transceiver module: MMA2P00-AS-SP (NVIDIA)

◆ Other Option
HVS-AUX16A/16B/16C/16D/32A/64A (*) Auxiliary unit (Ethernet LAN Connection)
(*) Connectable max. 4 units

8
Trademarks
Windows is either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
* All other trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Font
The font used in this product is the Ricoh Vector Font designed by Ricoh Company Limited.

AC Cord Clamp Installation

Secure the AC cord with the supplied ladder strap/retention clip assembly to prevent accidental
removal from the unit.
1) Insert the anchor into the hole next to the AC inlet.
2) Plug in the AC cord.
3) Adjust the strap length to fit.
4) Wrap the AC cord clamp around the AC cord.
5) Gently pull on the AC cord to ensure it has been securely plugged in.
3)

1)

2) 4)

Installing the HDMI Cable Lacing Bracket

Secure the HDMI cable to the panel with the supplied cable
lacing bracket. 2)
3)
1) Plug the HDMI cable into the HDMI connector on the rear panel.
2) Loosen (but do not remove) the screw above the connector.
3) Place the bracket on the screw, above the connector.
Tighten the screw (but not too tight) to secure the bracket. 1)
4) Use the supplied tie wrap to secure the bracket to the connector.
5) Tighten the tie wrap and cut off any excess.

4)
5)

9
Table of Contents
1. Prior to Starting .................................................................................................................................. 14
1-1. Overview .................................................................................................................................. 14
1-2. Features ................................................................................................................................... 14
2. Quick Start ......................................................................................................................................... 16
2-1. Connections (MV-1640IP) ........................................................................................................ 16
2-2. Connections (MV-3240) ........................................................................................................... 18
2-3. Connections (MV-3240IP) ........................................................................................................ 19
2-4. Registering IP Stream Data (MV-1640IP/3240IP) ................................................................... 21
2-5. Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 22
2-5-1. Setting Network Connections ........................................................................................... 22
2-5-2. Verifying Output ................................................................................................................ 22
2-5-3. Installing and Starting Software ........................................................................................ 23
2-5-4. Changing Output Settings ................................................................................................. 23
2-6. 4K Layout Mode ....................................................................................................................... 24
2-6-1. Outputting IP Input Source to 4K Full Screen (MV-1640IP/3240IP)................................ 24
2-6-2. Outputting SDI Input Source to 4K Full Screen ................................................................ 26
2-6-3. Outputting a Multi-window Screen in HD .......................................................................... 27
2-6-4. Outputting a Multi-window Screen in 4K ........................................................................... 29
2-6-5. Displaying a Clock in 4K Multi-window Screen ................................................................. 31
2-7. Layout Editor Basic Operations ............................................................................................... 33
2-7-1. Layout Editing While Viewing the Video Monitor .............................................................. 33
2-7-1-1. Layout Editing While Viewing the Output Layout ...................................................... 33
2-7-2. Loading Preset Layouts from the Main Unit ..................................................................... 34
2-7-3. Selecting/Deselecting Multiple Windows .......................................................................... 34
2-7-4. Deleting a Layout .............................................................................................................. 34
2-7-5. Adding Windows ............................................................................................................... 35
2-7-6. Deleting Windows ............................................................................................................. 35
2-7-7. Moving Windows ............................................................................................................... 35
2-7-8. Resizing Windows ............................................................................................................ 36
2-7-9. Copying Windows ............................................................................................................. 36
2-7-10. Changing Window Sources ............................................................................................ 37
2-7-11. Saving Edited Layouts .................................................................................................... 37
3. Panel Descriptions ............................................................................................................................. 39
3-1. Front Panel ............................................................................................................................... 39
3-1-1. Function Buttons ............................................................................................................... 40
3-2. Rear Panel ............................................................................................................................... 42
3-3. Genlock / FS Mode .................................................................................................................. 44
3-3-1. FS Mode ........................................................................................................................... 44
3-3-2. Reference Source ............................................................................................................. 44
3-3-2-1. Delay Reduction Mode .............................................................................................. 45
3-3-2-2. Output Phase Adjustment ......................................................................................... 45
3-3-2-3. System Delay (MV-1640IP/3240IP) .......................................................................... 45
4. System Block Diagram ...................................................................................................................... 46
4-1. When SDI Inputs Are Installed ................................................................................................. 47
4-1-1. Cascade Setting................................................................................................................ 47
4-2. Layout Control System ............................................................................................................. 49
4-3. Audio Output ............................................................................................................................ 50
4-4. Audio Assignments .................................................................................................................. 52
5. Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 53
5-1. Operation at Startup ................................................................................................................. 53
5-2. Re-initialization ......................................................................................................................... 53
5-3. Front Panel Operation .............................................................................................................. 53

10
 5-3-1. Locking / Unlocking Front Panel Buttons .......................................................................... 53
5-3-2. Opening Menus................................................................................................................. 53
5-3-3. Showing / Hiding the Layout Editor Screen ...................................................................... 54
5-3-4. Multi-window Display (Layout Selection/ Auto Sequence) ............................................... 54
5-3-5. Full Screen Display ........................................................................................................... 54
5-3-5-1. Full Screen Output..................................................................................................... 55
5-3-6. Setting / Canceling All Mute .............................................................................................. 55
5-3-7. Showing the Audio Monitor ............................................................................................... 55
5-3-8. Outputting SDI / HDMI / AUDIO Test Signals ................................................................... 56
5-3-9. USER Button Functions .................................................................................................... 56
6. Screen Display .................................................................................................................................. 58
6-1. Screen Display Mode ............................................................................................................... 58
6-2. Multi-window Display Mode...................................................................................................... 60
6-3. Quad Window Settings............................................................................................................. 60
6-3-1. 4K (SQD) .......................................................................................................................... 61
6-3-2. Up Resize ......................................................................................................................... 62
6-4. Mirror Window Settings ............................................................................................................ 63
6-5. Title Display .............................................................................................................................. 64
6-5-1. Text Display Aspect .......................................................................................................... 65
6-5-2. Text Size ........................................................................................................................... 65
6-5-3. Number of Characters ...................................................................................................... 66
6-5-4. Text Alignment .................................................................................................................. 66
6-5-5. Matte Width ....................................................................................................................... 66
6-5-6. Text Display (Source/Format/Window/AFD/ Alarm/Logo) ................................................ 67
6-6. Tally .......................................................................................................................................... 68
6-6-1. Tally Indication .................................................................................................................. 68
6-6-1-1. Tally Frame Display ................................................................................................... 68
6-6-1-2. Tally Frame/Split Display ........................................................................................... 69
6-6-1-3. Tally Indicator Display ............................................................................................... 69
6-6-1-4. Tally Frame and Indicator Display ............................................................................. 69
6-6-1-5. Tally Frame/Split and Indicator Display ..................................................................... 70
6-6-1-6. Tally Frame Overlap Mode ........................................................................................ 70
6-6-2. Tally Inputs ........................................................................................................................ 71
6-7. Crop.......................................................................................................................................... 72
6-7-1. Crop Area.......................................................................................................................... 73
6-8. AFD .......................................................................................................................................... 74
6-8-1. AFD Cropping ................................................................................................................... 74
6-8-2. AFD Codes ....................................................................................................................... 75
6-8-3. AFD Code Abbreviations .................................................................................................. 77
6-9. Audio Level Meter .................................................................................................................... 78
6-9-1. Audio Level Meter ............................................................................................................. 78
6-9-2. Audio Level Meter Display Modes .................................................................................... 79
6-9-3. Audio Data Presence Indication ....................................................................................... 80
6-9-4. Audio Level Meter Settings ............................................................................................... 81
6-9-5. Audio Level Alarm ............................................................................................................. 85
6-9-6. Silence (Over Level) Alarm Example ................................................................................ 86
6-9-7. Audio Signal Loss Alarm Example.................................................................................... 87
6-10. Closed Captioning .................................................................................................................. 88
6-10-1. Closed Caption Data Alarm Display ............................................................................... 89
6-10-2. CC Loss Alarm Example ................................................................................................. 90
6-10-3. Closed Caption Data Status Indication ........................................................................... 91
6-10-4. CC Status Display Example ............................................................................................ 91
6-11. Video Alarm ............................................................................................................................ 92
6-11-1. Luminance (Black Level) Alarm Example ....................................................................... 94
6-12. Timecode Loss Alarm Display (MV-1640IP/3240IP) ............................................................. 96

11
 6-13. Alarm Display Mode ............................................................................................................... 96
6-13-1. Blinking Border Alarm Display ........................................................................................ 97
6-14. Ancillary Time Code (ATC) Display ....................................................................................... 97
6-15. Clock, Timer and Information Display .................................................................................... 98
6-16. SNTP - Internal Clock Correction via Network ..................................................................... 102
6-16-1. Time Zone ..................................................................................................................... 102
6-17. Logo / Background Image Display ....................................................................................... 103
6-18. Safety Area Marker .............................................................................................................. 104
6-18-1. Display Type ................................................................................................................. 105
6-18-2. Marker Type .................................................................................................................. 106
6-18-3. Aspect/Size ................................................................................................................... 106
6-19. Auto Sequence ..................................................................................................................... 106
6-19-1. Multi-window Auto Sequence ....................................................................................... 106
6-19-2. Full Screen Auto Sequence .......................................................................................... 107
6-19-3. Window Auto Sequence ............................................................................................... 107
6-20. LPF (Low Pass Filter) Settings ............................................................................................ 108
6-21. Simplified SDR/ HDR (HLG) Conversion ............................................................................. 108
7. Menu Operation ............................................................................................................................... 111
7-1. Main Menu ............................................................................................................................. 112
7-1-1. SAVE CHANGE? ............................................................................................................ 113
7-1-2. Menu Structure - Levels .................................................................................................. 114
7-2. FRONT FUNC SET ................................................................................................................ 115
7-3. AUDIO .................................................................................................................................... 116
7-4. DATE/TIME ............................................................................................................................ 117
7-5. SNTP ...................................................................................................................................... 118
7-6. SNMP ..................................................................................................................................... 119
7-7. LAN ........................................................................................................................................ 120
7-8. AUTHENTICATION ................................................................................................................ 121
7-9. GENLOCK .............................................................................................................................. 121
7-10. VERSION & OPTION ........................................................................................................... 123
7-11. VIEWER ............................................................................................................................... 124
8. Information Display .......................................................................................................................... 125
8-1. Information Display - Text ...................................................................................................... 125
8-2. Information Display - Log ....................................................................................................... 126
8-3. Information Display - Unit Information .................................................................................... 127
8-4. Information Display - Output Information ............................................................................... 128
8-5. Information Display - Audio Information ................................................................................. 128
8-6. Information Display - LAN Information ................................................................................... 128
8-7. Information Display - Version Information .............................................................................. 129
9. LAN Interface ................................................................................................................................... 130
9-1. LAN Interface Communication Standard ............................................................................... 130
10. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................. 132
Appendix 1. Tally Indication List .......................................................................................................... 133
1-1. To use GPI-IO (MV-1640IF Option) ....................................................................................... 133
1-2. To Use Command .................................................................................................................. 135
1-5. To use TSL 5.0 ....................................................................................................................... 138
Appendix 2. Logo Control via GPI (MV-1640IF option) ....................................................................... 143
Appendix 3. Log Information................................................................................................................ 145
Appendix 4. Preset Layouts (Internal and CD) .................................................................................... 148
4-1. 4K Preset Layouts (Internal and CD) ..................................................................................... 149
4-2. 2K Preset Layouts (Internal and CD)) .................................................................................... 153

12
Appendix 5. GPI-IO Control (MV-1640IF) ........................................................................................... 156
5-1. GPI Input ................................................................................................................................ 159
5-1-1. Full Screen Source Switching 1 to 32 ............................................................................. 159
5-1-2. Multi-window Layout Switching ....................................................................................... 159
5-1-3. Red, Green, and Amber Tally Inputs (Source) ............................................................... 159
5-1-4. Red, Green, and Amber Tally Inputs (Window) .............................................................. 159
5-1-5. ADJ_IN (Time Correction Input) ..................................................................................... 159
5-1-6. Alarm Reset Input ........................................................................................................... 159
5-1-7. Count Up / Down Timer Control ...................................................................................... 160
5-1-8. Logo Data Switching ....................................................................................................... 160
5-1-9. Live Viewer Recording Start ........................................................................................... 160
5-1-10. Window Source Change ............................................................................................... 160
5-2. GPI Output ............................................................................................................................. 161
5-2-1. Power Unit 1 and 2 Status .............................................................................................. 161
5-2-2. FAN Alarm Output (Alarm Output for FAN Error) ........................................................... 161
5-2-3. GENLOCK Status ........................................................................................................... 161
5-2-4. External Time Correction Output .................................................................................... 161
5-2-5. Count Up / Down Timer Status ....................................................................................... 162
5-2-6. LTC Status ...................................................................................................................... 162
5-2-7. Screen Status among Full, Multi or Editor ...................................................................... 162
5-2-8. Preset / Source Status .................................................................................................... 162
5-2-9. Alarm / Status Output ..................................................................................................... 163
Appendix 6. SNMP Function ............................................................................................................... 164
Appendix 7. Ember+ Features ............................................................................................................. 194
Appendix 8. Input / Output Delay ........................................................................................................ 194
Appendix 9. Using AUX Box as a Remote Control Unit ...................................................................... 195
9-1. Connection of AUX Box ......................................................................................................... 195
9-2. Action Assignment to an AUX Box Button ............................................................................. 195
Appendix 10. Example of NMOS REST API (ST2110) Usage (MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP) ................... 196
10-1. Getting Receiver’s UUID List (MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP) ....................................................... 197
10-2. Changing the Receive Stream Settings of a Single Receiver (MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP) .... 198
10-3. Changing the Receive Stream Settings of Multiple Receivers (MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP) .... 199
10-4. Getting Receiver’s Settings (MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP) ......................................................... 201
Specifications and Dimensions ........................................................................................................... 202
Unit Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 202
External Dimensions ..................................................................................................................... 211

13
1. Prior to Starting
1-1. Overview
MV-1640IP is a compact (1U) multi-viewer with four optical ports (25GbE SFP28), featuring up to
16 video streams. High reliability is ensured by redundant transmission lines, and mixed monitoring
of SDI and IP input video is possible by installing an optional SDI card. MV video images can
transmit over IP as Full HD and HD.
MV-3240 is a compact (1U) multi-viewer monitoring up to 32 SDI input videos via 4 outputs.
MV-3240IP is a compact (1U) multi-viewer with eight optical ports (25GbE SFP28), featuring up to
32 video streams.

1-2. Features
➢ Video Input
MV-1640IP
Max video input 4K 1080p 1080i/720p SD
IP (ST2110-20) Max. 4 ch Max. 16 ch Max. 16 ch -
IP (ST2022-6) - Max. 14 ch Max. 16 ch -
SDI (MV-1640SDI option) Max. 4 ch
(*1)
Max. 16 ch Max. 16 ch Max. 16 ch
(MV-1640SDI-12G option) Max. 10 ch
(*2)

MV-3240
Max. video input 4K 1080p 1080i/720p SD
SDI (Standard) Max. 8 ch
(*1)
Max. 32 ch Max. 32 ch Max. 32 ch
(MV-1640SDI-12G option) Max. 20 ch
(*2)

MV-3240IP
Max. video input 4K 1080p 1080i/720p SD
IP (ST2110-20) Max. 8 ch Max. 32 ch Max. 32 ch -
IP (ST2022-6) - Max. 28 ch Max. 32 ch -
(*1) 3G-SDI x 4 (SQD)
(*2) Total channels of 12G-SDI and 3G-SDI (SQD or 2SI)

➢ Video Output
MV-1640IP/3240IP
Max. video output 4K 1080p 1080i/720p
IP (ST2110-20) - Max. 4 ch Max. 4 ch
IP (ST2022-6) - Max. 4 ch Max. 4 ch
SDI 1 ch Max. 4 ch Max. 4 ch
HDMI 1 ch (HDMI 2.0 Level B)

MV-3240
Max. video output 4K 1080p 1080i/720p
SDI 1 ch Max. 4 ch Max. 4 ch
HDMI 1 ch (HDMI 2.0 Level B)

14
➢ Audio Input
MV-1640IP
IP Max 16 channels of audio level metering for each video (ST2110-30)
SDI Max 16 channels of audio level metering for each SDI.
(MV-1640SDI option required)

MV-3240
SDI Max 16 channels of audio level metering for each SDI.

MV-3240IP
IP Max 16 channels of audio level metering for each video (ST2110-30)

➢ Audio Output
IP Max 16 channels of audio for each video (ST2110-30, MV-1640IP/3240IP)
SDI Max 16 channels of embedded audio for each video
HDMI Max 8 channels of embedded audio for each video

➢ VoIP Control: Supports IGMP V3 and NMOS: IS-04/05. (MV-1640IP/3240IP)

➢ Redundant transmission lines (Hitless failover complying with ST2022-7) (MV-1640IP/3240IP)
➢ Hybrid input system of SDI and IP video.(Option) (MV-1640IP)
➢ Input expansion while keeping low latency using cascade connection (MV-1640SDI)
MV-3240IP does not support this function.
➢ HD to 4K up-resizing
➢ Logo display in title areas
Import a bitmap from the logo registration screen, or generate and register a logo using a web
browser.
➢ Layout Manager
 Customize layouts, using the software in Windows to adjust image size, position, title
display, and other settings.
 Store layouts on the viewer.
 Recall saved layouts directly from the front panel control.
➢ Network video casting for checking output video on Windows PC
➢ Pre-alarm recording enabling network video capturing
➢ Audio Monitoring Output
➢ Error indication: Flashing error screens or displaying error icon or messages
➢ Tally, Title, and Timecode
➢ Time of day, Timer, and Information Display
➢ View error logs or user text in the Information Display.
➢ In addition to the reference signal, PTP lock and INPUT lock are available. (PTP lock is
supported on SFP ports A/B for the MV-1640IP and on SFP ports A/B and E/F for the MV-
3240IP). *On MV-1640IP/3240IP
➢ Can display time based on a 30-hour clock.
➢ Register up to 24 schedule timers per day for 1 week.
➢ Cropping
 Specify areas to crop in pixels or by percent.
 Background image is shown outside cropped areas (when there is no border).
 Aspect ratio also maintained after partial cropping (of one side, for example).
➢ Detects frozen frames. (Y/C and Y only) (When Y detection mode is selected, ineffective bit
number is settable.)
➢ Can use HVS-AUX16A/32A/64A/16B/16C/16D as a remote control unit. (Max. 4 AUX boxes
can be connected.)
➢ Air intake from the front and exhaust from the rear provide a wide range of installation
conditions.

15
2. Quick Start
This chapter describes the basic system setup process for your MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP multi
viewer.

2-1. Connections (MV-1640IP)

1 Connect the MV-1640IP to an AC power source using the supplied cord. Secure the cord with
the AC cord retaining clip. Ground the unit for your safety.
2 Connect an SDI monitor.
3 Connect an HDMI monitor.
4 Connect signal sources such as video cameras.
5 Connect a PC to be used for remote control and layout settings to the MV-1640IP LAN
connector using a LAN cable.
(LAN1: Factory default [Link]/24)
6 Connect a PC to be used for NMOS/ Ember+ control to the MV-1640IP LAN connector using
a LAN cable.
(LAN2: Factory default [Link]/24)
7 Attach two or four SFP transceivers (SFP28) to SFP ports and connect to LAN using optical
fiber cable.

◆ Input Connection
PTP Grand
Master

Camera
➢
images
➢
➢➢ Optical fiber cable
◆
IP Switch
SDI/IP
Gateway 【ST2110】
Camera
➢ 4K, Full HD, HD video
images
➢
➢➢ 【ST2022】
◆
Full HD, HD video
Trunk link
(Path redundancy)
1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT
LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OUTPUT
Cooling 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

fans
1
SER. NO.

2 3 4
12G/6G OPTION

LAN2 D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 SFP+

Fiber (SFP) ports

LAN 1 Receiver
[Link]/24 LAN 2
Input/ Output Port Web GUI [Link]/24
Power 51010 NMOS Input/ Output Port
supply command 51012
100/1000BASE-T

Ethernet Switch
Layout Manager
Live Viewer
LAN Command RDS
RDS
[Link]/24
Input Port 8080 Windows PC

Layout Manager
Web Browser
LAN command
Ember+ command

16
◆ Output Connection

PTP Grand HDMI monitor (4K)

Master

IP to HDMI
Converter

IP Switch
Optical fiber cable 【ST2110】
Full HD, HD video
【ST2022】
Full HD, HD video
Trunk link (Path redundancy)

1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT

LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1
OUTPUT Cooling 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SER. NO.
2 3 4

fans 12G/6G OPTION

LAN2 D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 SFP+

Fiber (SFP) ports

LAN 1 Receiver
Power [Link]/24 LAN 2
supply Input/ Output Port [Link]/24
51010 Input/ Output Port
51012

SDI monitor (4K) Ethernet Switch

RDS
[Link]/24
Input Port 8080
HDMI monitor (4K) RDS

SDI monitor
(3G)

17
2-2. Connections (MV-3240)
1 Connect the MV-3240 to an AC power source using the supplied cord. Secure the cord with
the AC cord retaining clip. Ground the unit for your safety.
2 Connect an SDI monitor.
3 Connect an HDMI monitor.
4 Connect signal sources such as video cameras.
5 Connect a PC to be used for remote control and layout settings to the MV-1640IP LAN
connector using a LAN cable.
(LAN1: Factory default [Link]/24)

Camera
images

SDI video x 32

1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT

LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
UPPER

Cooling
12G/6G
OPTION 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

OUTPUT
1

SER. NO.
2 3 4

fan LOWER
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

12G/6G
OPTION 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1

LAN 1
[Link]/24
Input/ Output Port
51010
Power
supply

HDMI monitor (4K)

100/1000BASE-T

Layout Manager
Live Viewer
SDI monitor (4K) LAN Command

Windows PC

SDI monitor
(3G) Layout Manager
Web Browser
LAN command

18
2-3. Connections (MV-3240IP)
1 Connect the MV-3240IP to an AC power source using the supplied cord. Secure the cord with
the AC cord retaining clip. Ground the unit for your safety.
2 Connect an SDI monitor.
3 Connect an HDMI monitor.
4 Connect signal sources such as video cameras.
5 Connect a PC to be used for remote control and layout settings to the MV-1640IP LAN
connector using a LAN cable.
(LAN1: Factory default [Link]/24)
6 Connect a PC to be used for NMOS/ Ember+ control to the MV-1640IP LAN connector using
a LAN cable.
(LAN2: Factory default [Link]/24)
7 Attach four or eight SFP transceivers (SFP28) to SFP ports and connect to LAN using optical
fiber cable.

◆ Input Connection

PTP Grand
Master

Camera
➢
images
➢
➢➢ Optical fiber cable
◆
IP Switch
SDI/IP
Gateway 【ST2110】
Camera
➢ 4K, Full HD, HD video
images
➢
➢➢ 【ST2022】
◆
Full HD, HD video
Trunk link
(Path redundancy)
1 AC100|240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI IO
LTC REP

1
OUTPUT Cooling

SER. NO.
2 3 4

fans
H G F E D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 LAN2 SFP+

Fiber (SFP) ports

LAN 1 Receiver
[Link]/24 LAN 2
Input/ Output Port Web GUI [Link]/24
Power 51010 NMOS Input/ Output Port
supply command 51012
100/1000BASE-T

Ethernet Switch
Layout Manager
Live Viewer
LAN Command RDS
RDS
[Link]/24
Input Port 8080 Windows PC

Layout Manager
Web Browser
LAN command
Ember+ command

19
◆ Output Connection

PTP Grand HDMI monitor (4K)

Master

IP to HDMI
Converter

IP Switch
Optical fiber cable 【ST2110】
Full HD, HD video
【ST2022】
Full HD, HD video
Trunk link (Path redundancy)

1 AC100|240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI IO

LTC REP

1
OUTPUT
Cooling

SER. NO.
2 3 4

fans
H G F E D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 LAN2 SFP+

Fiber (SFP) ports

LAN 1 Receiver
Power [Link]/24 LAN 2
supply Input/ Output Port [Link]/24
51010 Input/ Output Port
51012

SDI monitor (4K) Ethernet Switch

RDS
[Link]/24
Input Port 8080
HDMI monitor (4K) RDS

SDI monitor
(3G)

20
2-4. Registering IP Stream Data (MV-1640IP/3240IP)
When configuring the system described in the previous section, select the stream data to be input
to the IP input (Receiver) of the MV-1640IP/3240IP. The MV-1640IP/3240IP uses IS-04/05 to
manage IP inputs.
The following steps describe the procedure to set and switch IP input signals in the MV-1640IP/
3240IP.
* Make sure that RDS (Registration & Discovery System) and IP input sources (Sender) are
made available beforehand.

(1) Connect a cable to LAN2 and access the LAN2 Web GUI.
The factory default URL is [Link]
(2) From the top page of the Web GUI, select NMOS Settings to open the RDS settings page
and set the menu as follows. * Multicast DNS is not supported.

Connection Port: LAN2

Connection: Enable
IP Address: IP Address set in step a.
Port Number 8010
IS-01 API Version: Auto(Highest)

(3) After changing settings as above, confirm by clicking Submit.

(4) Then update screen by clicking Reload. If Status is Connected, the connection to RDS has
been established successfully.

The label name here appears as the name of the

sender/receiver.
“IS-04 Self Label”-SenderX-Video(Audio)
“IS-04 Self Label”-ReceiverX-Video(Audio/Meta)

In the steps so far, you can confirm that the IS-04 has successfully discovered and registered nodes.

(5) Select IP sources (Senders) for the IP inputs (Receiver) of 1640IP/3240IP using IS-05 on the
Broadcast Controller.

21
2-5. Setup
2-5-1. Setting Network Connections
Change PC network settings for an MV-1640IP/3240IP connection.
PC IP address [Link] (yyy: any number from 1 to 254 except that set for
the Main Unit and/or gateway addresses.)
Subnet mask Set to [Link].
* Change the MV-1640IP/3240IP Main Unit IP address via the Main Unit menu (See Sec.
0. “LAN.”) or Layout Manager (Controller screen). [Link] is the default address.
For MV-1640IP/3240IP, change the LAN2 IP address via the LAN2 Web GUI.
[Link] is the default address.

For MV-1640IP/3240IP, do not use the IP address obtained by adding 1 to the fourth octet
of the LAN1 IP address, as this is the address used within the product.
In case if factory default settings, [Link] is not settable.

2-5-2. Verifying Output

Turn the power of the Main Unit on. If no monitor image is displayed, output a test signal to
verify monitor operation. (See Sec. 5-3-8 “Outputting SDI/ HDMI/ AUDIO Test Signals.”)
Default setting:
Preset layout 1. (HDMI OUTPUT: 1080/59.94p, SDI OUTPUT: 1080/59.94i)

If nothing appears on the monitor!

Check to see if the monitor is properly connected. If there is still no display, check the
monitor specification to see if the aforementioned formats are supported.

22
2-5-3. Installing and Starting Software
Install Layout Manager from the supplied CD-ROM.
(1) Open the CD-ROM, and Layout Manager folder.
Double-click MV-1640IP_MV-3240_3240IP_LM_setup.exe, then install the program as
instructed by the setup wizard.
(2) On the desktop, double-click the MV-1640IP_MV-3240_3240IP Layout Manager icon to
start the program.
(3) Click the Online/Offline switch in the upper left corner of the main window.

(4) The connection dialog appears. Enter the Main Unit IP address, then click OK.
*If a connection cannot be established, check the LAN connection and network settings.
*[Link] is the default Main Unit IP address.

2-5-4. Changing Output Settings

If output frequency and/or Interlaced/ Progressive signal settings for 1920 x 1080 output need
to be changed based on the result of the test signal verification, follow the instructions below
to change settings.

(1) Click Layout Mode / Output Format in the Layout Manager Controller screen. The
following screen as shown below appears. This screen allows you to select output
frequency. See Sec. 5-4-1. “Layout Mode / Output Format” in the Layout Manager User
Manual for details on settings.

(2) Change (output) Frequency, 1080 I/P Output, SDI Output format and HDMI Output format
settings.
* Select a format that could be verified by the test signal.

(3) Select a Layout Mode from 4K Mode/ 2K Mode. See Sec.2-6 “4K Layout Mode” for
details on Layout mode.

(4) Click OK.

23
2-6. 4K Layout Mode
4K Layout mode enables you to output a multi-window layout in 4K resolution (3840 x 2160) using
SDI Out 1 - 4.
Start Layout Manager and follow the procedure as shown below.

(1) Click

(2) Confirm under

Layout Mode

2-6-1. Outputting IP Input Source to 4K Full Screen

(MV-1640IP/3240IP)
This section explains the procedure for outputting an IP input HD video in 4K size full screen
as shown in the figure below.
PTP
Grandmaster IP Out1-4

Camera
images

IP Switch
Camera 【ST-2110】
Optical fiber cable <RX>HD video x 16
images
<TX>Full HD video x 4

1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT

LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

OUTPUT
1
SER. NO.

2 3 4
12G/6G OPTION

LAN2 D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 SFP+

SFP ports
3G-SDI

12G-SDI

24
Select as shown in the figure below in Layout Mode / Output Format menu in the Layout
Manager Controller screen and click OK. (See Sec. 5-4-1. Layout Mode / Output Format in
the Layout Manager User Manual.)

Select SDI Progressive/

HDMI Progressive.

Select 12G-SDI.

Ex.) Outputs IP IN5 Images from SDI Out1-4 (IP Out1-4).

Press the MV-1640IP front panel buttons in the order shown below.

(3) Lit green (2)

(5) (Bright)
POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

(1) Lit green (4) Lit green

(Dim)

SDI Out1 outputs the 4K IP IN5 video via 12G-SDI.

SDI Out2-4 output the contracted IP IN5 video via 3G-SDI.
IP Out1 to 4 transmit the Full HD IP IN5 video over IP.

To output the video in 3G-SDI*4 (2SI) or 3G-SDI4 (SQD) format, select in Layout Mode /
Output Format > SDI Output Format menu in the Layout Manager Controller screen.

25
2-6-2. Outputting SDI Input Source to 4K Full Screen
This section explains the procedure for outputting HD video from SDI input to a 4K size full
screen. MV-1640IP needs an MV-1640SDI option.
MV-3240IP does not support SDI input.
Camera
images

Camera
images

HD-SDI HD-SDI

1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT

LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

OUTPUT
1

SER. NO.
2 3 4
12G/6G OPTION

LAN2 D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 SFP+

3G-SDI PTP
Grandmaster 【ST-2110】
Full HD video x 4
12G-SDI

Optical fiber cable

IP Switch
IP Out1-4

Ex.) Outputs SDI IN1 (IN17) images from SDI Out1-4 (IP Out1-4).
Press the MV-1640IP front panel buttons in the order shown below.
(3) Lit green (2)
(5) (Bright)

POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

(4) Lit green

(1) Lit green (Bright)

SDI Out1 outputs the 4K SDI IN1 video via 12G-SDI.

SDI Out2-4 output the contract SDI IN1 video via 3G-SDI.

In MV-1640IP,
IP Out1 to 4 transmit the Full HD SDI IN1 video over IP.

26
2-6-3. Outputting a Multi-window Screen in HD
For MV-1640IP, when using SDI input sources, the MV-1640SDI option is required.
MV-3240IP does not support SDI input.
Camera
images

Camera
images

HD-SDI HD-SDI
1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT
LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SFP ports
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

OUTPUT
1

SER. NO.
2 3 4
12G/6G OPTION

LAN2 D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 SFP+

HD-SDI

PTP
Grandmaster

Camera Optical fiber cable

images

Camera IP Switch IP Out1-4

images

Select as shown in the figure below in Layout Mode / Output Format menu in the Layout
Manager Controller screen and click OK. (See Sec. 5-4-1. Layout Mode / Output Format in
the Layout Manager User Manual.)

27
Editing Layout
Place a 2K video window in the editing area of the Layout Manager.

(1) Click

(5) Click
(2) Click
(4) Locate

(3) Click

Saving the edited layout

Save the layout as Preset 16 by following the procedure as shown below.

(6) Click

(7) Input
Name
(8) Click

To Change Mode to Multi-screen

Push the main unit front panel buttons in order as shown below.
(10) Lit Green
(Dark)
POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

(11) (9) Lit Green

The above procedures allow you to output the Preset 16 multi-video from SDI Out1-4 via HD-
SDI.

In MV-1640IP/3240IP,
IP Out1 to 4 transmit the Full HD Preset 16 multi-video over IP.

28
2-6-4. Outputting a Multi-window Screen in 4K
Camera
images

Camera
images

HD-SDI HD-SDI

1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT

LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SFP ports
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

OUTPUT
1

SER. NO.
2 3 4
12G/6G OPTION

LAN2 D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 SFP+

3G-SDI (2SI)

12G-SDI 【ST-2110】
<RX>HD video x 16
<TX>Full HD video x 4

PTP
Grandmaster

Camera Optical fiber cable

images

IP Out1-4
Camera IP Switch
images

Select as shown in the figure below in Layout Mode / Output Format menu in the Layout
Manager Controller screen and click OK. (See Sec. 5-4-1. Layout Mode / Output Format in
the Layout Manager User Manual.)

Select SDI Progressive /

HDMI Progressive.

Select 12G-SDI

29
Selecting Quad window in step (3) of Sec. 2-6-3, displays four consecutive input sources in a
single window.
(1) Click

(2) Click

(5) Click (4) Locate

(3)Click

Saving the edited layout

Save the layout as Preset 16 by following the procedure as shown below.

(6) Click

(8) Click

(7) Input name

30
2-6-5. Displaying a Clock in 4K Multi-window Screen
Arrange an information window in the layout edited in Sec. 2-6-4.
An information window can display a clock or a count up/down timer and etc.
Camera
images

Camera
images

HD-SDI HD-SDI

1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT

LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1
OUTPUT
SFP ports

SER. NO.
2 3 4
12G/6G OPTION

LAN2 D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 SFP+

3G-SDI

12G-SDI

PTP
Grandmaster
Optical fiber cable
Camera
images

IP Out1-4
IP Switch
Camera
images

Editing Layout
(1) Click

(2) Click

(5) Click
(4) Locate

(3)Click

31
Saving the edited layout
Save the layout as Preset 16 by following the procedure as shown below.

(6) Click

(8) Click

(7) Input name

32
2-7. Layout Editor Basic Operations
2-7-1. Layout Editing While Viewing the Video Monitor
(1) Click Layout Editor to open the Layout Editor page.
(2) Turn Edit Mode ON.
1 3

2-7-1-1. Layout Editing While Viewing the Output Layout

Click Output Preview (Editor Layout) (2-5-1 [3])to open the Output Preview page.
Moving the Output Preview page next to the Layout Manager page enables you to edit layout
while viewing the respective outputs layouts.

33
2-7-2. Loading Preset Layouts from the Main Unit
(1) Click on the Download from Main Unit icon on the toolbar.

(2) The following screen appears. Select a preset layout number, then click OK.

2-7-3. Selecting/Deselecting Multiple Windows

Selecting multiple windows
- Press the Ctrl and A keys to simultaneously to select all displayed windows.
- Click a window while pressing Ctrl to select multiple windows one by one. The current
window selection is indicated by a green-highlighted window number.

Deselecting multiple windows

- Press the Esc key to simultaneously deselect all windows.
- Click a window while pressing Ctrl to deselect multiple windows one by one.
- Clicking anywhere outside the window deselect all windows.

2-7-4. Deleting a Layout

To delete the layout that is being displayed, click the New Layout icon on the toolbar, or press
the Ctrl and A keys then click the Delete icon on the toolbar. Or press the Delete key.

34
2-7-5. Adding Windows
(1) Select a window type under Add / Paste Window in the left side of the Layout Editor.
(2) Click to select Quad (Quad windows for 4K image) or Single (Normal video window). A
red bounding box with an arrow at the center of the box appears. Click where you wish to
place a window. A window will be added.
* To exit Add / Paste Window, right-click the mouse or press the Esc key.

2-7-6. Deleting Windows

(1) Select a window to be deleted with the mouse. Window W02 is selected in the figure
below.

1 2

(2) Click the Delete icon on the tool bar, or press the Delete key to delete the selected
window.

2-7-7. Moving Windows

Window(s) can be moved by dragging and dropping them or entering the X and Y values under
Window.

35
2-7-8. Resizing Windows
Select a window. Placing the pointer over one of the four window corners turns the pointer into
a resizing arrow. Drag the arrow and resize the window. Entering the W and H values under
Window also resizes windows.

2-7-9. Copying Windows

Pasting windows by changing the window type
(1) Select a window or windows to be copied.
(2) Click Copy on the tool bar, or press the Ctrl + C keys.
(3) Select a window type under Add / Paste Window.
* This step is not needed for logo windows.
(4) Click Paste to paste the window, starting at the upper left corner of the output screen.
To paste the window to a desired location, hover the mouse pointer over the desired
position, then press the Ctrl + V keys.

Pasting windows without changing the window type

(1) Select a window or windows to be copied.
(2) Click Copy on the tool bar, or press the Ctrl + C keys.
(3) To paste a window to the upper left of the screen, click the Paste icon while holding down
the Shift key. To paste a window to a desired location, hover the mouse pointer over the
desired position, then press the Shift + Ctrl + V keys.

IMPORTANT
When copying and pasting multiple windows
The order of layers is not preserved because windows are copy-pasted from a small number
in Video 2K, Video 1K, Video/Information 2K, Video/Information 1K and mirror windows.

36
2-7-10. Changing Window Sources
Double-click the window on the Editor screen, or click the Window Settings icon on the tool
bar, go to the [Video - General] menu then select the Input Source.

This can also be done by right-clicking the window and selecting the window source under
Input Source.

2-7-11. Saving Edited Layouts

Save edited layouts to the Main Unit or PC in order to avoid inadvertent loss or corruption,
caused by an accident, such as a sudden disconnection.

◆ Saving Layouts to the Main Unit

To save an edited layout to the Main Unit, select a preset layout number. The factory default
layout will be overwritten.

(1) Click the Upload to main unit icon ( ) on the toolbar.

(2) Select a preset number, then click OK.
* A preset layout name can be set, helping identify layouts when downloading or switching
preset layouts via the Controller screen (Layout Manager).

37
* Note that the Main Unit stores only the selected layout (output).

◆ Saving Layouts to PC
Click the Export icon ( ) next to the Online/Offline button, then a window allowing you to
select a directory to save a layout opens. Enter a file name, and select a directory. The layout
data with system and source settings will be saved into the file.
See Sec. 4-2. “Saving/Loading Setting Files” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

* Note that the computer stores all layouts (outputs).

38
3. Panel Descriptions
3-1. Front Panel
6
MV-1640IP 2
POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP

8
POWER 2

3 4 8
1
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

5 7

MV-3240/MV-3240IP
6
2
POWER 1 1-16
AUTO ALL OUT /17-32 USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-3240

8 3
FULL OUT1
4
OUT2 USER2 ENTER
8
1
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

5 7

No. Name Description

POWER Used to turn Power unit 1 or 2 On/Off. Pressing "|" turns on the power.
1 1 and 2 * The POWER 2 switch is effective only if the MV-1640PS redundant power
switches supply option is installed.
POWER Lit Power is being supplied
1 and 2 Unlit No power
A fan failure is occurring.
Lit Turn the power of the unit OFF immediately and
FAN contact your service representative.
ALARM Unlit All fans are operating normally.
The unit temperature reaches 85°C and more.
Status Flashing
2 Check unit installation and operation status.
Lamp
Status lamp for reference signal
Lit Genlocked
REF Unlit Unlocked
LOCK Flashing Unlocked (Different output video and reference
signal frequencies.)
* For MV-1640IP/3240IP, flashes when PTP Lock is
selected and also during Hold Over operation.
Used to select an input source, layout or setting, or to directly input numbers
3 1-16
while using the menu.
Function
4 See Sec. 3-1-1 “Function Buttons.”
Buttons
Hold down ←(MUTE) at least 2 seconds to mute all audio outputs
In Non- (SDI embedded, HDMI, and analog audio).
↑, ↓, menu
← operation Hold down →(TEST) at least 2 seconds to output HDMI / SDI /
5 AUDIO test signals.
(MUTE),
→(TEST) In Menu
Used to select and change settings.
operation

39
No. Name Description
Hold down at least 2 seconds to lock or unlock front panel buttons.
Lit Front panel buttons are locked.
In Non- Unlit Front panel buttons are operative.
menu
ENTER Front panel lock alarm (Flashes for about 2 seconds
6 operation
(LOCK) when a front panel button is used while buttons are
Flashing locked.)
* The MENU button is still operable.
In Menu Used in menu settings to confirm settings or to go to subsidiary
operation menus.
Used to open and close menus, and to return to upper menus from subsidiary
menus.
7 MENU * To open the menu screen, hold down at least 2 seconds.
Lit Menu is in use.
Unlit Menu is not in use.
Used to air-cool the unit to prevent overheating. Do not block the ventilation
8 Vent
with other equipment or objects.

3-1-1. Function Buttons

AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2

/MULTI

VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3

/AUDIO

* A function button is inactive when its LED is unlit.

Name Description
Used to start auto sequence in each mode.
Pressing any button from 1 to 16 (see (3) in the previous page)
stops auto sequence and displays the selected video source or
AUTO layout.
Lit (bright) Auto sequence is in process.
Lit (dark) Auto sequence is NOT in process.
Used to switch between Full screen and Multiview display.
Used to toggle Layout Editing mode ON/OFF by holding down the
button.
FULL/MULTI Lit (bright) Full screen mode
Lit (dark) Multi-window mode
Flashing Layout Editing mode
Used to select video/ audio mode.
VIDEO/AUDIO Lit (green) Video mode is in process.
Lit (amber) Audio mode is in process.
ALL OUT Applies settings to all output ports.
OUT1 Applies settings to SDI / IP Out1 and HDMI Out. (*1)
OUT2 Applies settings to SDI / IP Out2. (*1)
OUT3 Applies settings to SDI / IP Out3. (*1)
OUT4 Applies settings to SDI / IP Out4. (*1)

40
 Name Description
MV-1640IP: IP/SDI In Full screen mode, used to switch input source.
Lit (dark) MV-1640IP: Selects IP input source.
MV-3240/3240IP: MV-3240: Selects SDI input source 1 - 16.
1-16/17-32 MV-3240IP: Selects IP input source 1 - 16.
MV-1640IP: Selects SDI input source.
Lit (bright) MV-3240: Selects SDI input source 17 - 32.
MV-3240IP: Selects IP input source 17 - 32.
User assignable functions:
USER1 to 3 - Window source assignment
- Recording start on Live Viewer
- Information display type selection / log scrolling
(*1) Only MV-1640IP/3240IP supports IP transmission.

41
3-2. Rear Panel
MV-1640IP 11 12 13 14

1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT

LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

8
OUTPUT
1 3 1

SER. NO.
2 3 4
12G/6G OPTION

LAN2 D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 SFP+

2 4 5 6 7 9 10
* MV-1640SDI option and MV-1640IF options are installed in above figure.

MV-3240
11 12 13 14
1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT
LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
UPPER

12G/6G
OPTION 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

OUTPUT
1

SER. NO.
2 3 4

1 3 8 LOWER
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

12G/6G
OPTION 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1

2 4 5 6 7

MV-3240IP 11 12 13

1 AC100|240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI IO

LTC REP

1 3 1
OUTPUT
8

SER. NO.
2 3 4

H G F E D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 LAN2 SFP+

2 4 5 6 7 9 10

No. Name Description

Supply 100-240 VAC using the supplied cord.
1 Power Input1
(100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz)
Ground Used to ground the unit to protect operators against static electricity
2
Terminal and electrical shock.
Used to connect an optional MV-1640PS (redundant power supply
3 Power Input 2
unit). Use the supplied cord. (100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz)
4 SDI OUTPUT 1 Used to output 12G/3G(Level-A)/ HD-SDI signals.
5 SDI OUTPUT 2- Used to output 3G/ HD-SDI signals.
4 When OUT1 is set for 12G-SDI, OUT2-4 is used for 3G-SDI.
6 HDMI OUT Used to output HDMI video and audio signals. Outputs 1080p,
1080i, 2160p signals.
Supports HDMI2.0 Level B. When using HDMI2.0 Level B, use a
3840 x 2160 (59.94p or 50p) monitor supporting YUV[Link].
As for audio, outputs SDI OUT1 audio.
7 LAN1 A LAN (Ethernet) connector. Used to connect a PC to be used to
edit layouts, or to remotely control the unit. The PC can also be
used for SNMP observation. (See Sec. 9. “LAN Interface” for
details.)
8 Used to cool the unit to prevent overheating. Do not block the
Cooling Fans
ventilation with other equipment or objects.
9 LAN2 A LAN (Ethernet) connector. Used to connect a PC to be used to
control using NMOS/Ember+.

42
 No. Name Description
10 SFP A/B IP input: SFP A/B, C/D, E/F and G/H (ST2022-7 path redundant)
SFP C/D ST2110: 2160p, 1080p, 1080i and 720p uncompressed video,
SFP E/F audio and metadata.
ST2022: 1080p, 1080i and 720p uncompressed IP signals.
SFP G/H
IP output: SFP A/B (ST2022-7 path redundant)
(SFP28, 25GbE)
ST2110: 1080p, 1080i and 720p uncompressed video / audio.
ST2022: 1080p, 1080i and 720p uncompressed IP signals.
PTP Sync and NMOS control (IS04, IS05) connection
11 GPI-IO MV-3240/ MV-1640IP/ MV-3240IP (MV-1640IF option)
Used for GPI input/ output such as tally display (red, green and
amber) for each channel, layout switching and alarm output.
See Appendix 5, “GPI-IO Control (MV-1640IF)” for details.
12 LTC MV-3240/ MV-1640IP/ MV-3240IP (MV-1640IF option)
Used to input timecode. Used to synchronize analog or digital clock
with timecode. (Only the time can be synchronized.)
13 REF MV-3240/ MV-1640IP/ MV-3240IP (MV-1640IF option)
Used to input external reference signal synchronizing HDMI or
12G/3G/HD-SDI output signals.
See Sec. 3-3-2. “Reference Source” for details.
14 SDI INPUT 1-16 MV-1640IP (with an MV-1640SDI option):
Up to 16 inputs of 3G/HD/SD-SDI signals can be accepted.
* SDI INPUT 9-16 will support 12G/6G/3G-SDI by installing the
MV-1640SDI-12G option.
SDI INPUT 1-32 MV-3240:
Up to 32 inputs of 3G/HD/SD-SDI signals can be accepted.
* SDI INPUT 9-16 and 25-32 will support 12G/6G/3G-SDI by
installing (up to 2) MV-1640SDI-12G options.

IMPORTANT
 There is no input/output frame rate converter.
 Use SDI or HDMI monitors that support 1920 x 1080 (59.94 or 50) interlaced or progressive
video signals, or 1280 x 720 (59.94 or 50) progressive video signals.
 The frequencies of IP input and MV output must be matched. If they are different, the input
signal format information is incorrectly recognized. (Refer to Sec. 5-4-1. “Layout Mode/
Output Format” in the Layout Manager User Manual.

43
3-3. Genlock / FS Mode
3-3-1. FS Mode
Select FS Mode for each input source or each window by accessing Layout Manger. Use Field
Synchronous mode (Field) for video sources with a lot of movements and Frame Synchronous
(Frame) for video sources with relatively few movements. It is recommended to set Frame
Synchronous to PsF signals. (For MV-1640IP, PsF signal is supported for only SDI input with
MV-1640SDI option installed. For MV-3240IP, PsF signal is not supported.)
The I/O delay is 1-2 fields in Field Synchronous mode and 2-4 fields in Frame Synchronous
mode.

3-3-2. Reference Source

MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP output formats and their compatible reference sources are
shown in the table below. If no or invalid genlock signal is input, the system hanged to free-
running mode.
(See Sec. 5-5. "Genlock Setting" in the Layout Manager User Manual.)

◆ REF IN Lock Format Table (External Reference Signal)

✔: Compatible, -: Incompatible
3840x2160/59.94p 3840x2160/50p
Video out 1080/59.94p 1080/50p
Ref in 1080/59.94i 1080/50i
720/59.94p 720/50p
B.B. (NTSC) ✓ -
TRI (1080/59.94i) ✓ -
TRI (720/59.94p) ✓ -
B.B. (PAL) - ✓
TRI (1080/50i) - ✓
TRI (720/50p) - ✓

◆ Input Lock Format Table (Reference Signal) (Supports SDI IN1 only)
✓: Compatible, -: Incompatible
MV-3240IP does not support Input Lock.
3840x2160/59.94p 3840x2160/50p
Video out 1080/59.94p 1080/50p
Ref in 1080/59.94i 1080/50i
720/59.94p 720/50p
1080/59.94p-Level B ✓ -
1080/59.94p-Level A ✓ -
1080/59.94i ✓ -
720/59.94p ✓ -
525/60 ✓ -
1080/50p - ✓
-Level B
1080/50p - ✓
-Level A
1080/50i - ✓
720/50p - ✓
625/50 - ✓

44
◆ PTP Lock Format Table (Synchronizing Network)
✔: Compatible, -: Incompatible
3840x2160/59.94p 3840x2160/50p
Video out 1080/59.94p 1080/50p
Ref in 1080/59.94i 1080/50i
720/59.94p 720/50p
PTP ✓ ✓

3-3-2-1. Delay Reduction Mode

If all input signals or specific input signals are synchronized (with H phase difference
approximately within ±1 line) to an external reference signal, the signal processing delay
between input and output can be reduced from 2-field to 1-field delay (for Main SDI/HDMI Out).
Delay Reduction mode can be set in the Main Unit menu. See Sec. 7-9. “GENLOCK” for details.
(See the Layout Manager User Manual when setting from Layout Manager.)

IMPORTANT
If all input signals or signals other than specific inputs are not synchronized with a
reference input, screen tearing will occur when Delay Reduction is enabled. Use Delay
Reduction mode only when you are sure these input signals are synchronized.
For IP video, when editing windows of less than 480 horizontal pixels (the size of a 64-split
4K layout) and selecting Vphase larger than 2 lines in GenlockSetting, turn off Delay
Reduction mode. This may cause screen tearing. Delay Reduction mode is automatically
set to OFF if an input signal goes out of sync.

3-3-2-2. Output Phase Adjustment

Horizontal and vertical output signal phases can be adjusted against input external reference
signals. See Sec. 7-9. “GENLOCK” for details on phase adjustment settings in the Main Unit
menu. (Output phase adjustment can also be set in the Controller screen in Layout Manager.)

3-3-2-3. System Delay (MV-1640IP/3240IP)

Camera Switch MV

4K Output
16.6 ms

If the following system requirements are satisfied, it is possible to build a system with minimum
output delay of 16.6 ms.

System Requirement
IP Standard ST2110
Adjustable range 1,350us: 45line
Minimum Window size Horizontal 480 pixels 480 pixels
Delay Reduction Mode ON
Genlock Setting V phase ±2line
Output format 12G-SDI(2SI), HDMI4K

45
4. System Block Diagram
LM (Layout Manager), Main Unit front panel and Command control ranges and reference sections are shown in the below table.
4K Layout mode (Screen 1-4 integrated layout) Temporary input source switch Temporary audio switch * Audio monitor source selection is
4K Screen (Multi-screen) Audio monitor source 1 Source 1 overwritten by switching the
Input source 1-32 .. .. preset layout.
1
Full-screen Layout - Top Left Window1 Source1 .. ..
Full-screen Layout (4K Size) - Top Right : : Audio monitor source 4 Source 32
- Bottom Left
3 Window XX Source 32
Screen 1-4
Layout for 4K - Bottom Right
Preset layout 1
2 * Window source selection is Audio 9
Multi-screen Audio monitor source 1-4
6 Overwritten by switching the Adaptive

: 4 preset layout.
Preset layout 16 Fixed 11
Audio monitor source 1-4 10
Editor screen Input source 1-32

8 13 14
Audio monitor source 1-4 5 12
HDMI2.0
Video Output screen selection Level B
Mode HDMI Out
2K Layout mode (Screen 1-4 layouts) Test
SDI Out1 Setting Audio
Audio 4K Top Left signal SDI Out1
IP Out1 output
Input source 1-32 2K Screen1 HDMI Out output IP Out1
Full-screen Layout (2K Size) setting
Full-screen
1 Layout (2K Size)
4K Top Right SDI Out2 SDI Out2
IP Out2 HDMI IP Out2
Packet
3 4K Bottom Left SDI Out3 Mute
/SDI SDI Out3
Layout for 2K IP Out3 IP Out3
Preset layout 1
2 Gain
/AUDIO
4K Bottom Right SDI Out4 SDI Out4
Multi-screen Audio monitor source
IP Out4 IP Out4
: 4
Preset layout 16
7
Audio monitor source Output setting 1080 / 720 1080 I / P
Editor screen
Live Viewer
Frequency 59.94 / 50
Output 15
Audio monitor source 1-4

… No LM Unit Com No LM Unit Com

1 Full-screen source ✓ ✓ ✓ 9 Audio adaptive mode ✓ ✓ ✓
Input source 1-32 2K Screen4 selection Monitor source selection
Full-screen Layout (2K size)
Full-screen
1 Layout (2K Size) 2 Preset multi-window setup ✓ ✓ ✓ 10 Audio fixed mode ✓ ✓ ✓
Layout selection Monitor source selection
3 3 Full / Multi-window selection ✓ ✓ ✓ 11 Audio mode / Output selection ✓ - ✓
Layout for 2K
Preset layout 1
2 4 Edit Mode ON/OFF ✓ ✓ ✓ 12 HDMI2.0 Level B mode setting ✓ - -
Multi-screen Audio monitor source
5 4K/2K mode selection ✓ - - 13 Audio output setting ✓ ✓ △
: 4
Preset layout 16
6 Window source switching ✓ △ ✓ 14 Test signal output ✓ ✓ ✓
Audio monitor source 7 Output setting ✓ - - 15 Live Viewer output selection LV / - -
Editor screen Web
8 Output screen selection ✓ - - △: Some functional limitations
Audio monitor source

46
 4-1. When SDI Inputs Are Installed
The number of maximum inputs is 32 for MV-3240. As for MV-1640IP, it is expanded to 32 (IP16 +
SDI16) when an MV-1640SDI option is installed. MV-3240IP does not support SDI input.

4-1-1. Cascade Setting

Multiple MV-1640IP/MV-3240s can be cascaded on MV-1640IP with MV-1640SDI option
installed or CH1-4 of the MV-3240 SDI input to display the input signals from the connected
MV-1640IP/MV-3240s as background video. Up to four units can be connected, and up to 4
input images can be displayed together on a single output. Set the number of cascade
connections for that unit in the settings of each MV-1640IP/MV-3240. The MV -3240IP can
only be cascaded as the first unit.
Set in GENLOCK > CASCADE menu. (See Sec. 7-8. “GENLOCK” for details.)
Cascade Output setting can also be set in the Genlock Settings screen in Layout Manager.
(See Sec. 5-5-1. “Setting Screen” in the Layout Manager User Manual.)

<Cascade Connection Example: 64-split screen is displayed on the fourth unit.>

MV-1640IP - 1 MV-1640IP - 2 MV-1640IP - 3 MV-1640IP - 4

4K Layout 4K Layout 4K Layout 4K Layout

st
Cascade setting: 1 Cascade setting: Nth Cascade setting: Nth Cascade setting: LAST
Ref. type: PTP Ref. type: INPUT Ref. type: INPUT Ref. type: INPUT

PTP

REF REF REF REF

IN IN IN IN
SDI OUT SDI IN SDI OUT SDI IN SDI OUT SDI IN
1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4
SDI OUT
1-4

4K output monitor

Notes on Cascade connection

 Genlock settings for cascade connection units. (Refer to Sec. 5-5. “Genlock Setting” in
the Layout Manager User Manual.)
First unit: All settings available
Second and subsequent units: No settings available. Input Lock is automatically set.
(SDI IN1 *)
* MV-1640IP needs an MV-1640SDI option.
 If connection number is incorrectly set, cascade connection cannot be created properly.

47
  The cascade connection does not support 1080i input signals. However, the last unit
can output signals with 1080i/p or 720p/12G/4K.
 The SDI Output Format setting of units to be cascaded should be unified as SQD or
2SI, in 4K/2K mode, or 720p in 2K mode.
 When SQD is selected, the background display does not work properly if HDMI is set
to 4K mode or SDI is set to 12G.
 In a cascade connection, if KEY items with transparent elements (Title, Level Meter,
Logo and Tally Marker) of the second or subsequent MV devices are placed outside
the multiview image, or if an analog clock is inserted, keying process is not performed
in the preceding MV image (including the background video), and the subsequent MV
image will be directly pasted over it.
 When cascading units in 2K mode, the four 1K windows are dedicated for cascading
and the window sources cannot be changed.
 The layout mode of all cascaded MV units must be the same; 4K or 2K mode.

<Standard delay of each output from reference signal>

Output Delay
1st unit: Approx. 0μs 2nd unit
1080i: Approx. 20us
720p: Approx. 10us
1080p/12G: Approx. 2us
SDI OUT1-4
3rd unit 4th unit
1080i: Approx. 22us 1080i: Approx. 24us
720p: Approx. 20us 720p: Approx. 30us
1080p/12G: Approx. 4us 1080p/12G: Approx. 6us
1st unit: Approx. 0μs 2nd unit
1080i: Approx. 20us
720p: Approx. 10us
1080p: Approx. 2us
HDMI OUT 4K: Approx. 10us
(Designed value) 3rd unit 4th unit
1080i: Approx. 22us 1080i: Approx. 24us
720p: Approx. 20us 720p: Approx. 30us
1080p: Approx. 4us 1080p: Approx. 6us
4K: Approx. 12us 4K: Approx. 14us

48
4-2. Layout Control System
The below figure depicts the control system for editing layouts, and switching outputs and sources
(Steps 1 through 6 in the Output Control System block diagram, See Sec. 4).

Control PC
HDD

Control PC (1) File transfer

Layout Manager (2) Download from Main Unit

(5)Full screen setting

(4) Upload to Main Unit

(3) Layout editing

Multi screen Full screen

Edit mode
1-16 4K Out
Unsaved
Saved Saved

(6) Layout selection

Temporary
Output layout
(7) Information window assignments / Unsaved
Window source change

Main Unit

Monitor

49
 (1) File transfer Layouts edited with Layout Editor are saved to or recalled from a
PC.
(2) Download from Layouts are downloaded from the Main Unit to the Layout
Main Unit Manager when the Main Unit and Layout Manager are connected
in Online mode or “Download from Main Unit” is performed.
(Select a layout from Preset layouts 1 to 16 of 4K output mode.)
The downloaded layout will be loaded onto the Edit mode screen.
(3) Layout editing When the Main Unit and Layout Manager are connected in Online
mode, a layout is edited both in Layout Editor and Edit mode
screen in the Main Unit. The layout can be edited and checked on
the monitor at the same time.
* The Edit mode screen is in a temporary memory buffer, so the
layout on the Edit mode screen will be lost when the Main Unit
power is turned off. Be sure to save your layouts to PC as a file, or
to the Main Unit as a preset layout.
(4) Upload to Main Unit Edited layouts (in Edit mode) can be saved as preset layouts 1 to
16 in 4K Layout mode.
(5) Full screen setting Sets up a title, audio level meter or other settings.
(6) Layout selection Loads a layout to Temporary (output layout) from Edit mode
screen or preset layouts 1 to 16 of the multi-window display.
(7) Information window Information windows can be reassigned for multi-window layout
assignments/Windo windows in the Temporary memory (Output layout). Each window
w source change source can also be changed.
* Temporary data files are not saved.

4-3. Audio Output

In the MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP, source audio channels that are assigned to input sources
can be selected for an audio monitor output for each output, and audio level meters for each window
in each layout.
The audio monitor output settings are set under (1) to (6) in the Controller/Layout Editor screens
(below) for SDI or HDMI audio outputs. SDI outputs can output 16-channel and HDMI outputs can
output 8-channel audio streams. The below block diagram depicts the audio output flow chart.

Source1-32 SDI Out1-4

Audio monitor
Gain Packet Mute Test SDI OUT 1-4
MV-1640IP
SDI Mute SDI Tone
IP IN1-16 MV-1640IP
OUT OUT1-4 * HDMI OUT is
IP IN1-16 1-4 common with
SDI IN1-16
SDI IN1-16 SDI Out1

MV-3240 MV-3240
SDI IN1-32 SDI IN1-32

MV-3240IP MV-3240IP
IP IN1-32 IP IN1-32

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Audio input Audio output select Gain Individual All mute Test
channel settings mute & signal
assignment packet

50
<Controller>

1
4 5
6

<Layout Editor>

1 Audio assignments See Sec.4-4. “Audio Assignments”

2 Window source Assign sources to respective windows.
assignments
3 Audio output select Select an input source for monitoring output (Sounds out
from speakers) per Screen. (Layout Editor page)
4 Gain settings Adjust audio gain between -20dB and 20dB for each
output port.
5 Individual mute & packet Turn the mute on or off for each output port.
settings
6 All mute settings Turn the mute on or off for all output ports.
7 Test signal settings Turn the 1kHz tone signal output on or off for each output
port.

51
4-4. Audio Assignments
Select audio channels to be assigned to SDI and HDMI outputs for each audio source.
Available audio sources are 16 channels for IP/SDI input.
SDI input is selectable when MV-1640SDI option is installed.

Source1

IP/SDI (1) SDI Output /

Embedded audio Lv Meter audio

Audio CH1 CH1

… …
Audio CH8 CH8
… …
Audio CH16 CH16

Source2
… (2) HDMI Output
audio
…
CH1
…
…
Source32
CH8

1 SDI Output / Lv Meter audio * Selects 16 audio channels for SDI output and Level
Meter.
For 3G-SDI (Level-B) signals, 16 audio channels in
Link A are available, but audio channels in Link B are
unavailable when MV-1640SDI option is installed.
2 HDMI output audio Same audio sources as SDI output CH 1-8 are used
for HDMI output.
*MV-1640IP needs an MV-1640SDI option.
MV-3240IP does not support SDI input.

52
5. Operation
5-1. Operation at Startup
When the power is turned on, the Main Unit displays an INITIALIZATION screen, then starts up
with the screen display of the last layout before the power was turned off.
If the Main Unit was turned off while using menus, the screen display will show the last layout before
any menu had been used.

5-2. Re-initialization
Although initialization is normally not required, the Main Unit factory settings can be restored by re-
initialization when previous data is no longer needed, such as after a relocation or system
modification.
Turn on the power while holding down the MENU button. A "PARAMETER CLEAR" message
appears on the monitor screen and the setting data will be re-initialized.

POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

IMPORTANT
LAN and the following settings can be re-initialized. Layout setting data will not be re-initialized.
- Preset values for count-up / down and schedule timers
- Information display text strings
- Log data (Information display/Web page)
- Audio mute and gain settings

5-3. Front Panel Operation

5-3-1. Locking / Unlocking Front Panel Buttons
POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

Hold down the ENTER(LOCK) button. The button LED will be turned on red to lock front panel
buttons. The ENTER(LOCK) button will blink if pressing a button in Panel Lock mode.
To unlock Panel Lock mode, hold down the ENTER(LOCK) button. The button LED will be
turned on light green.

5-3-2. Opening Menus

POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

Hold down the MENU button. The button LED will be turned on green. See Sec. 7. “Menu
Operation” for details on menus. (Menus can be accessed even while front panel buttons are
locked.)

53
5-3-3. Showing / Hiding the Layout Editor Screen
2 1

POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

(1) Press the ALL OUT button

(2) Hold down the FULL/MULTI button. The button LED blinks and the Layout Editor screen
appears on the SDI and HDMI monitors.
Hold down the FULL/MULTI button again. The button LED lights, clearing the Layout
Editor screen.

5-3-4. Multi-window Display (Layout Selection/ Auto Sequence)

4 2

POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP

FAN
ALARM
4 FULL
/MULTI OUT1 OUT2 USER2 (MUTE)
ENTER
(LOCK) (TEST)

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU

REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

3 1

(1) Press the VIDEO/AUDIO button. The button will light green
(2) Press the ALL OUT button.
(3) Press the FULL/MULTI button. The button LED will be turned on dark green (Multi
screen display)
(4) Select a layout using the number buttons (1-16).
To start auto sequence, press the AUTO button.
To stop auto sequence, press any number button (1-16).

5-3-5. Full Screen Display

5 5 2 4

POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

3 1

Ex.)Display the video of input source 3 (IP IN3) from all output ports in full screen
(1) Press the VIDEO/AUDIO button. The button will be turned on green
(2) Press the ALL OUT button.
(3) Press the FULL/MULTI button. The button LED will be turned on bright green. (Full
screen display)
(4) Press the IP/SDI (MV-1640IP) / 1-16/17-32 (MV-3240/MV-3240IP) button. The button
LED will be turned on dark green. (IP input)
(5) Press the number button 3. The video of input source 3 appears on the SDI and HDMI
monitors in full screen.
Press the AUTO button to perform an auto sequence.

To select input source 17-32, press the IP/SDI (MV-1640IP) / 1-16/17-32 (MV-3240/MV-
3240IP) button in step (4). The button LED will be turned on bright green and press 1-16.
(Selectable when MV-1640SDI option is installed in MV-1640IP.)

54
5-3-5-1. Full Screen Output
The display will differ depending on whether the source assigned to the full screen is set to
the 4K source start channel (4K Start Channel) or not.

4K Start Channel:
The 4K image of the input source will be displayed.

If not the Start Channel:

A 2K source (Source 1) assigned to the full screen
will be up-resized to 4K and displayed.

See Sec. 5-3-2. “Video Block Settings” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details on
setting.

5-3-6. Setting / Canceling All Mute

POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

Hold down the ← (MUTE) button. The button LED will be turned on bright green to mute all
audio outputs (SDI and HDMI).
To cancel All Mute, hold down the ← (MUTE) button. The button LED will be turned on dark
green.

5-3-7. Showing the Audio Monitor

2 3

POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

Ex.) Displaying the SDI Out1 audio monitor in 4K mode

(1) Press the VIDEO/AUDIO button. The button LED will be turned on amber.
(2) Press the Out1 button.
(3) The source number button set by audio monitor lights.
Source 1-16: The IP/SDI (MV-1640IP) / 1-16/17-32 (MV-3240/MV-3240IP) button LED
will be turned on amber (dark).
Source 17-32: The IP/SDI (MV-1640IP) / 1-16/17-32 (MV-3240/MV-3240IP) button LED
will be turned on amber (bright). (Selectable when MV-1640SDI option is installed in MV-
1640IP.)
* A number button that is unlit cannot be selected.

55
5-3-8. Outputting SDI / HDMI / AUDIO Test Signals
POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP

FAN
2 FULL
/MULTI OUT1 OUT2 USER2 (MUTE)
ENTER
(LOCK) (TEST)
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

1 3

(1) Hold down the → (TEST) button. The button LED will be turned on blinking amber and
enable test signal. A color bar and 1kHz tone signals are output from both the SDI and
HDMI ports and a 1kHz tone signal is output from AUDIO OUT.
(2) Pressing a button from 1 to 10 allows you to change the signal format as shown in the
table below.
Button SDI / IP HDMI AUDIO (SDI/HDMI/IP)
1 1080/59.94i 720x480p 59.94Hz 1kHz Tone
2 1080/50i 720x576p 50Hz 1kHz Tone
3 1080/59.94p 1920x1080p 59.94Hz 1kHz Tone
4 1080/50p 1920x1080p 50Hz 1kHz Tone
5 1080/59.94i 1920x1080i 59.94Hz 1kHz Tone
6 1080/50i 1920x1080i 50Hz 1kHz Tone
7 720/59.94p 1280x720p 59.94Hz 1kHz Tone
8 720/50p 1280x720p 50Hz 1kHz Tone
SDI: 2160/59.94p
9 3840x2160p 59.94Hz 1kHz Tone
IP: 1080/59.94p
SDI: 2160/50p
10 3840x2160p 50Hz 1kHz Tone
IP: 1080/50p
11 1080/59.94p 2SI 1920x1080p 59.94Hz 1kHz Tone
12 1080/50p 2SI 1920x1080p 50Hz 1kHz Tone

(3) To disable test signal output, hold down the → (TEST) button for it to light dark green.

5-3-9. USER Button Functions

Assign functions to the USER1 to USER3 buttons for use.
◆ Assigning Functions to USER 1-3
To assign functions to USER 1-3, open the FRONT FUNC SET menu (See Sec. 7-2. “FRONT
FUNC SET”), or the System > User Function menu in Layout Manger - Controller.

The following functions can be used:

Function Description
Window Source Assign Assigning input sources to widows.
LV REC Start Starting recording on Live Viewer.
In order to start a recording, the following conditions are
required.
- Live Viewer (MV-1640IP/MV-3240 bundled software) is
connected to the specified port for USER buttons.
- Recording status is Recording Standby [Auto-/Ext-
/User-Trigger], which can be verified by pressing REC in
the AlarmWindow > Alarm Recording in the Live Viewer.
Info1-4 Type Select Display type switch for Information display / LOG scrolling.
* Select Information Display 1-4 when assigning functions to
USER buttons.

56
Once functions are assigned to USER buttons, use them in the following manner.

◆ Window Source Assign (Assigning input sources to windows)

5 6 2 4 1 7
POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER

3
/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2

Ex.) Changing W01 input source to input source 5 and displaying Window Auto
Sequence (To assign these actions to USER1: )
(1) Press the USER1 button.
(2) Press the ALL OUT button (in 4K mode) or any button of OUT1 to OUT4 (in 2K mode).
* Note that if the selected output is in editing mode (displayed on the Editor screen),
this function is disabled.
(3) Press ↑ and ↓ buttons to select the video window (W01) while looking at the SDI or
HDMI monitor. Once selected, the window borders turn green.
* Safety Area Marker settings of the video window are disabled.
(4) Press the IP/SDI (MV-1640IP) / 1-16/17-32 (MV-3240/MV-3240IP) button. The button
LED will be turned on dark green. (IP input selection)
(5) Press Button 5 to change the source to 5.
(6) Press AUTO to start Window Auto Sequence.
(7) Press the USER1 button to close the function.

IMPORTANT
When in 2K layout mode and the cascade setting is set to Nth or Last, source
assignment switching for 1K Video Windows 20 to 23 is not available.

◆ LV REC Start (Starting recording on Live Viewer)

Ex.) When the function is assigned to the USER2 button
(1) Press the USER2 button. Live Viewer recording starts.
(2) Recording stops when the preset time has passed.
Refer to Sec. 4-3-3 “Recording” in the Live Viewer User Manual for recording time
details.

◆ Info1-4 Type Select (Display type switch for Information Display / Log Scrolling)
Ex.) When the function is assigned to the USER3 button
(1) Press the USER3 button.
(2) Press ← and → buttons to select the information display type.

<If Log is selected>

Press ↑ and ↓ buttons to scroll through logs on the Information Display.
Holding down ↑ and ↓ buttons scrolls backward/ forward in 16 lines.
* The Information Display in editing screen cannot be changed.

57
6. Screen Display
The MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP allows you to display signals with titles, alarms, and audio level
meters. This section describes those display functions.

IMPORTANT
The processing time for the title, alarm, etc., displays vary depending on the size and number of
displays. If the layout or source is switched while being processed, the title display may not match
the layout or source.

6-1. Screen Display Mode

The screen display mode setting allows you to select from either ASPECT, FIT SCREEN or
ASPECT (AFD) mode. In all 3 modes, titles, time codes, and audio level meters can be positioned
anywhere. *The Quad window display always retains the aspect ratio of each input source video at
16:9.
Audio level meter (L) Video area Audio level meter (R)
* 8 ch max. * 8 ch max.
Time code Tally frame Border

Title 1, 2
<Layout Manager setting view> <Actual output image (16：9)>

NOTE
Tally frames and borders are displayed within a video area. If the tally frame or border display
is turned on, black bars will be displayed. If both displays are turned off, black bars will not be
displayed. Black bar color can be selected from the border color value, luminance setting (0%
black to 100% white) or OFF. The black bars visualize the aspect ratio difference of input
videos against the video window.

<Aspect Mode>
The aspect ratio of the input signal is retained.

Black bar Black bar

58
<Fit Screen Mode>
The image is displayed to best fit the on-screen video window regardless of the aspect ratio of the
input signal.

<ASPECT (AFD) Mode>

Crops and adjusts aspect ratio according to the AFD code embedded into input signals.

e.g.) When an AFD code, 4:3-L 16:9T is embedded into an SD-SDI (525/59.94i) signal

Aspect ratio adjusted

Tally

Black bar cropped

<ASPECT Mode> <ASPECT (AFD) Mode>

IMPORTANT
This mode is enabled when MV-1640SDI option is installed in the MV-1640IP or SDI signal is
input to MV-3240.
If no AFD code is embedded or unsupported AFD code is embedded, the input video aspect
ratio is retained and the video images will not be cropped.

59
6-2. Multi-window Display Mode
Layouts are fully customizable using the supplied application, Layout Manager.

<Ex.> When WINDOWs 1 to 4 are set as follows, the screen appears as shown below.
Input signal Display mode Audio meter TC Tally
WINDOW 1 16:9 ASPECT 4 OFF OFF
WINDOW 2 4:3 FIT SCREEN 2+2 ON ON
WINDOW 3 4:3 ASPECT 4+4 ON OFF
WINDOW 4 NONE FIT SCREEN 2 ON OFF

[Link]

(1)

1080/59.94i
(5)
(2) Source 1 Source 2

[Link] [Link] (6)

VIDEO LOSS (7)

(3)

Source 3
(4)

No. Name Description

Displays respective input video images.
(1) Video window Display appears differently according to the screen mode
settings.
Used to display window titles, input formats, input source names
(2) Titles 1 - 4 1-4, AFD codes, alarms and/or title logos.
Up to 4 titles for each window can be displayed.
(3) Audio level meter Displays audio level meters for input signals.
Displays borders on each window frame. Blinking borders can be
(4) Border
displayed for the alarm display.
Displays tally frames on each window frame.
(5) Tally
* Tally indicators can be displayed at the same time.
(6) Time code Displays ancillary time codes (ATC).
Displays video and audio alarms. Alarms can be displayed with
(7) Alarm
alarm text strings, icons, or blinking border displays.

6-3. Quad Window Settings

4K (3840x2160) video can be monitored in Quad windows using four 3G-SDI inputs in SQD format
and up-scaling one of four 3G/HD inputs to 4K (Up Resize).
See Sec. 6-3-1 "Window" in the Layout Manager User Manual.

IMPORTANT
A Quad window consumes 4 single windows out of the total number of windows that can be
displayed.
The Crop (AFD) setting is ineffective for Quad windows. Display mode for Quad windows is
fixed to “Aspect.”

60
6-3-1. 4K (SQD)
Assigning one source number for an Input source automatically assigns 4 consecutive source
signals for a 4K (SQD) window as shown below.

Ex.) The below figure depicts the Quad window set as follows.
WINDOW 1 Input source Monitored source
(4K (SQD)) S01 SRC 1 Top Right

1) <SRC 1> <SRC 2>

12：34：55：24

2) LUMA FREEZE

TITLE 1
<SRC 3> <SRC 4>

3) 4)

1) Input source
According to the input source number setting, 4 consecutive source signals are
automatically assigned from the top left to right, then bottom left to right, windows.

2) Audio level metering

The Quad Window audio monitoring source setting allows a source signal to be selected
for audio level metering. One of 4 source signals assigned to the Quad Window can be
selected. The audio data of the selected source signal will be displayed in audio level
meters.
In the above example Quad Window, the audio level meters monitor the audio data in the
SRC 2 (source 2) that is assigned to the top right of the Quad Window.

3) Alarm
Detects and displays alarms for each input source signal. A blinking border alarm display
initiated when an alarm occurs in any one of four source signals.
Audio alarms (audio signal loss/audio over level/audio silence) are initiated when an
alarm is detected in the monitored source signal.

IMPORTANT
Setting alarm detection ON for a Quad Window via window setting menus enables alarm
detection in each source signal assigned to the Quad Window. Setting alarm detection ON
via source setting menus enables alarm detection in the source signal for which alarm
detection is set to ON*. Audio alarm detection in a Quad Window is enabled when the
source alarm setting is set to ON for the monitored source signal. See Secs. 6-3-2-4.
“Video Alarm ON / OFF” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details on window/source
settings, 6-7-3-7. “Audio Level Meter” for details on the monitored source, 6-7-3-6.
“Timecode” for details on timecode loss alarm, 6-7-3-9. “Closed Caption” for details on
closed caption alarm, and 5-12-5-2. “Video” for CRC error/HDCP alarm details.
* To employ source settings, select a source under Source/Window in window setting
menus and set alarm detection ON/OFF for each source signal in the Input Setting
page.

61
4) Other items
Displays the title 1 - 4, tally, time code, and safety area marker set for the source signal
selected as input source (1).
In the above example, items set for SRC 1 are displayed.

6-3-2. Up Resize
Up Resize allows you to scale video inputs up to 4K size (3840 x 2160) for 2K windows and
2K size (1920 x 1080) for 1K windows.

Ex.) The below figure depicts the Quad window set as follows.
WINDOW 1 Input source Monitored source
(Up Resize) S01 SRC 1 -

(1) SRC1

12：34：55：24

(2)
LUMA FREEZE

TITLE 1

(3) (4)

(1) Input source

The input source is scaled up.

(2) Audio level metering

Displays audio level metering of the input source. Note that monitoring audio channels
are fixed and cannot be changed in Quad windows.

(3) Alarm
Detects and displays alarms for the input source signal. A blinking border alarm display
initiated when an alarm occurs in the input source.

(4) Other items

Displays the title 1-4, tally, time code, and safety area marker set for the source signal.

62
6-4. Mirror Window Settings
The Mirror window is a window that can display up to 5 windows in 2K layout mode.
The same input source as the Video 2K Window number set in the Copy Window item of the Mirror
window can be displayed.

<Ex.> When WINDOWs 1 to 4 are set as follows, the screen appears as shown below.
Input Source/ Displayed
Window Type
Copy Window Input Source
W01 Video 2K Window01 IN01 IN01
W02 Video 2K Window02 IN02 IN02
W03 Video 2K Window03 IN03 IN03
W04 Mirror Window01 Video 2K Window02 IN02

(1) (2)
(1) Copy Window
The input source assigned to the Video 2K Window set in the Copy Window item of the Mirror
window will be displayed.

IMPORTANT
The Mirror window has a Copy Window item instead of an Input Source item.
In 2K layout mode, Video 2K Window can be selected from 1 to 8.

(2) Other Items

Other items in the mirror window (Title 1 - 4, Audio level meter, Tally, etc.) are the same as
those in non-mirror windows such as Video 2K Window.

IMPORTANT
Quad window display by Mirror window is not supported.
In addition, when Video 2K Window set under Copy Window is not displayed, the Mirror windows
becomes black.

63
6-5. Title Display
Title displays allow you to display titles of input sources, video formats, external devices (such as
switchers) that are assigned to source videos, window names, input signal AFD codes, alarm states
and/or text logos into windows in screen outputs. Title displays can be set as shown below using
Layout Manager. See Sec. 6-3-6. “Title 1 - 4” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

Layout Editor Screen > Window Layout Screen

Title1, 2 Display
Anchor
Display Text Counts
(Number of characters, see Sec. 6-5-3)
Align (Left/Center/Right, see Sec. 6-5-4)
Size (Font size, see Sec.6-5-2)
Aspect (Character size mode, see Sec.6-5-1)

Text Type
Text Window (Window title) Select titles to display
Color Select which type of title to
be displayed from Window,
Transparency Source Name1-4, Format,
Edge Type (Off/Edge/Matte) AFD, Alarm or Logo. See
Color Sec.6-5-6
Transparency
MatteWidth (Max/Text, see Sec. 6-5-5

AFD code Alarm text

Detects and displays Audio alarm
AFD codes in input Video alarm
signals. CC alarm
(Displayable regardless of
Logo each alarm display
setting.)

Controller Screen
Slot/Input Tally/Title SourceName (Title) Text Input (16 Max Char)

Settings System Settings Format Text Text Input (16 Max Char)

System General Source Static

Name Type TSL3.1/4.0(IF)
TSL5.0

Static or TSL5.0 can be selected when Text

Type is set to Source Name1-4 in the
Window Layout screen.

64
<Example>
TITLE1 TITLE2 TITLE1 Source
Window Source Source Format text
Text type Text type Text text 1
1 1 Source Name1 Source Name2 ON AIR 1 CAM 1 1080/59.94i
2 2 Window Source Name1 NEXT 2 CAM 2 720/59.94p
3 1 Source Name1 AFD - 3 CAM 3 525/60
Source Name1 Format Source
4 2 - Source -
text 2
5 3 Source Name1 Alarm - 1 Source Name1 -

Source Name1 NEXT Top: TITLE 1

CAM 1 CAM 2 Bottom: TITLE 2

WINDOW1(SRC1) WINDOW2(SRC2)
CAM 1 CAM 2 CAM 3

16:9-F 16:9 720/59.94p VD LOSS(Lo)

WINDOW3(SRC1) WINDOW4(SRC2) WINDOW5(SRC3)

6-5-1. Text Display Aspect

Text display aspect can be selected from Same magnification mode or Double height mode.

<Same size mode (W1:H1)>:

Useful when displaying Japanese characters.

<Double height mode (W1:H2)>:

Useful when displaying alphanumeric characters.

6-5-2. Text Size

Text sizes are determined by selecting title sizes 1 through 15 as shown below.

Same size Double height Same size Double height

Title mode (pixel) mode (pixel) Title mode (pixel) mode (pixel)
size size
Width Height Width Height Width Height Width Height
1 8 8 8 16 9 40 40 40 80
2 12 12 12 24 10 44 44 44 88
3 16 16 16 32 11 48 48 48 96
4 20 20 20 40 12 52 52 52 104
5 24 24 24 48 13 56 56 56 112
6 28 28 28 56 14 60 60 60 120
7 32 32 32 64 15 64 64 64 128
8 36 36 36 72

65
6-5-3. Number of Characters
Specify the number of characters to display or to be set as the background size of the text
display. Setting range: 1 to 16

The maximum title width for a line is 1024 pixels.

6-5-4. Text Alignment

- Select where to align text displays.
- Setting options are: Left, Center, and Right.
- Odd-numbered character text displays are center-aligned within the specified space.
- Externally changed titles such as those through TSL are also aligned as specified.

Ex.: To display “TEXT” with the number of characters set to 8.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
<Left align> T E X T
<Center align> T E X T
<Right align> T E X T

6-5-5. Matte Width

- Select a matte width mode.
- Setting options are: Max, and Text.
- Max: The matte size is the specified number of characters.
- Text: The matte size is determined by the number of actually entered characters.

If a title is shorter than the specified number of characters:

Ex. To display “TEXT” (Number of characters: 8, Alignment: Left):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
<Max> T E X T

<Text> T E X T

Ex. To display “TEXT” (Number of characters: 8, Alignment: Center):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
<Max> T E X T

<Text> T E X T

Ex.: To display “TEXT” (Number of characters: 8, Alignment: Right):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
<Max> T E X T

<Text> T E X T

66
If a title is longer than the specified number of characters:
Ex: To display “1080/59.94i” (Number of characters: 9, Alignment: Left):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
<Max> 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 . 9

<Text> 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 . 9 4 i
If the matte width is set to Text, the title will be left-aligned and the matte
widened to the required width to display all characters.

Ex.: To display “1080/59.94i” (Number of characters: 9, Alignment: Center):

-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
<Max> 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 . 9

<Text> 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 . 9 4 i
If the matte width is set to Text, the title will be center-aligned and the
matte widened in both directions to display all characters.

Ex.: To display “1080/59.94i” (Number of characters: 9, Alignment: Right)

-2 -1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
<Max> 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 . 9

<Text> 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 . 9 4 i
If the matte width is set to Text, the title will be right-aligned and the matte
widened left to whatever width needed to display all characters.

6-5-6. Text Display (Source/Format/Window/AFD/ Alarm/Logo)

- Allows you to set the text type for title displays.
- Select which text to display from among Source Name1, Source Name2, Source
Name3, Source Name4, Format, Window, AFD, Alarm, and Logo.
- Source Name1, Source Name2, Source Name3 and Source Name4: Displays the text
set for input sources. Text streams to be displayed can be set from Layout Manager
Controller screen > Input Setting > Tally/Title - Source Name (Title).
- Format: Displays the input source format. Format text streams to be displayed can be
set from Layout Manager Controller screen > System > Format > Text.
- Window: Displays the text set for windows.
- AFD: Displays the AFD code embedded into input sources.
* Displays according to the AFD abbreviation list in Sec. 6-8-2. AFD Codes.”
* Available when MV-1640SDI option is installed in MV-1640IP and SDI signal is input to
MV-3240.
Alarm: Displays alarm(s) occurring in an input source.

Alarms are displayed as follows.

Alarm For one alarm For multiple alarms
Video signal loss VD LOSS (Lo) Lo
Video freeze VD FRZ (F) F
Luminance level VD LUMA (Lu) Lu
Black level VD BLK (B) B
CRC error CRC ERR (CE) CE
Audio signal loss AD LOSS (L) L
Audio silence AD SILC (S) S

67
 Alarm For one alarm For multiple alarms
Audio over level AD OVER (O) O
Closed caption loss CC LOSS (CC) CC
Timecode loss TC LOSS (TC) TC
Ex.) If video signal loss, audio silence, closed caption loss alarms are detected:
V: Lo A: S/CC

- If Logo is selected, logo images registered as Title Logo can be used.

For logo registration, refer to Sec. 2-6. "Text Logo" in the Web Browser User Manual and
Sec. 8-1-4. "Registering Images to the Main Unit" in the Layout Manager User Manual.

6-6. Tally
Turn Tally detection ON to use the tally function.
See “Appendix 1. Tally Indication List” for details on tally input and indication.

6-6-1. Tally Indication

A tally frame or tally indicators can be displayed if Tally detection is enabled. The tally
indication color can be selected from red, green and amber via Layout Manager. See Sec. 5-
12-1. “System” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

6-6-1-1. Tally Frame Display

Tally frames are displayed around borders. To turn the respective window tally frame displays
off, set Frame Off in the Window setting screen in Layout Manager. See Sec. 6-3-10. “Tally”
in the Layout Manager User Manual. The tally frame width can be set to between 2 and 100
pixels. See Sec. 5-12-1. “System” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

Border

Video image Tally frame

4 to 100 pixels

4 to 100 pixels

Black bars

IMPORTANT
The video image size is reduced to display tally frames if a tally frame display is set to ON.
Black bars are displayed if the screen display mode is set to ASPECT.
To change display mode for the Video Black Areas, set Video Black Area: Color Select.
See Sec. 5-12-1-2. “Video” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

68
6-6-1-2. Tally Frame/Split Display
If Frame/Split is selected in Layout Manager, a tally frame, split into left and right appears
outside the border of each window.

Border

Red Green
Video Image
Black area Black area

Tally frame / split display

6-6-1-3. Tally Indicator Display

If Indicator is selected in Layout Manager, tally indicators are displayed.
The square tally indicators can be placed anywhere you wish via Layout Manager. The aspect
ratio of tally indicators can be selected from 1:1, 16:9, 4:3, or FREE. FREE allows you to freely
change the aspect ratio and size.

Border

Black area Video Image Black area

Tally indicators

6-6-1-4. Tally Frame and Indicator Display

If Frame+Indicator is selected in Layout Manager, a tally frame appears outside the border
of each window, and tally indicators can be placed anywhere in the window.

Border
Tally frame
display
Black area Video Image Black area

Tally indicators

69
 6-6-1-5. Tally Frame/Split and Indicator Display
If Frame/Split+Indicator is selected in Layout Manager, a tally frame, split into left and right
appears outside the border of each window, and tally indicators can be placed anywhere in
the window.

Border

Red Green
Video Image
Black area Black area

Tally indicators
Tally frame/split display

6-6-1-6. Tally Frame Overlap Mode

When Frame or Frame+Indicator is selected as the Display setting in the Layout Manager
and Frame Overlap Mode is enabled, two tally frames are overlaid outside the border for each
window. In the case of Frame+Indicator, markers can also be placed freely within the window.

Border

Video Image
Black area Black area

Tally indicators

Tally frame overlap display

For border display, the tally frame can be displayed in a border color when the tally input is
OFF by setting the Tally Color for No Tally setting to Border Color.
This is effective when you want to make the video display area as large as possible.

70
6-6-2. Tally Inputs
Select which type of input tallies Layout Manager uses from the following three: (1) GPI-IO,
(2) Command and (3) TSL5.0 (Ethernet). Setting Input Select to Individual Source allows
you to specify input tallies for each input source respectively. In addition, specify input tallies
for each source in each window. (See the figure below.) See Sec. 6-3-10. “Tally” in the Layout
Manager User Manual.

Refer to the following figure. Also, see Sec. 5-12-1. “System” in the Layout Manager User
Manual.

(1) GPIO (IF)

(2) Command
(3) TSL5.0 (Ethernet)

See “Appendix 1. Tally Indication List” for details.

71
6-7. Crop
The crop setting allows you to set the effective pixel area (where a picture exists) in the input video
images. Two crop modes are available: Cropping then enlarging images to their original size
(Mode1), and just cropping unwanted areas (Mode2). If set to Mode 1, the larger you set the crop
area on the input video, the more the video image is enlarged.
See Sec. 5-3-2. “Video Block Settings” and 6-3-2. “Video” in the Layout Manager User Manual for
details on crop settings.

Ex.) Mode1 Input Image

Side Panel Letterbox

Crop right and left. Crop top and bottom.

Output Image

Ex.) Mode2

Input Image
Crop right and left. Crop top and bottom.
Output Image

The Video Black Area settings are also applied to the cropped area display. To display the
background video on the cropped areas, set Video Black Area to OFF. (See Sec. 5-12-1-2. “Video”
in the Layout Manager User Manual.)

72
6-7-1. Crop Area
Set the cropped area in pixels or percentage (%). The latter has an advantage that is
independent from the input signal format. The maximum size of the crop area must remain
within the below parameters.
Horizontal area:
Horizontal pixel value of input signal - (minus) crop area ≧ (equal to or less than) 120 pixels
Vertical area:
Vertical line value of input signal - (minus) crop area ≧ (equal to or less than) 80 lines

73
6-8. AFD
6-8-1. AFD Cropping
Automatically crops or converts the aspect ratio according to the AFD (Active Format
Description) data if found in the ancillary data packet in 3G-SDI, HD-SDI, or SD-SDI input
signals.
AFD code SMPTE 2016-3 is supported.

◆ AFD code
SMPTE 2016-3: Aspect ratio data inserted as data packets into the ancillary data space of 3G/
HD /SD-SDI signals (1080p(3G), 1080i/PsF, 720p, 525/59.94i, and 625/50i).

See Secs. 5-3-2. “Video Block Settings,” 5-12-6-3. “AFD”, and 6-3-2-2. “Display Mode” in the
Layout Manager User Manual for details.

Ex.) AFD CODE 4:3-L 16:9T

Monitor screen image

Auto cropping

Black area cropped, and

Area to be automatically cropped (4:3→16:9) aspect ratio converted

IMPORTANT
Available when MV-1640SDI option is installed in MV-1640IP or SDI input signals in MV-3240.
The MV-1640IP/MV-3240 does not process grayed areas in figures in Sec. 6-8-2. “AFD
Codes,” so the aspect ratio may not always be retained. In such case, adjust the crop value
referring to Sec. 5-12-6-3. “AFD” in the Layout Manager User Manual.
WSS AFD data is not supported.
If no AFD code is embedded or unsupported AFD code is embedded, the input video aspect
ratio is retained and the video images will not be cropped.

74
6-8-2. AFD Codes
◆ AFD 4:3 Code
MV-1640IP
AFD: 4:3
specified name Description
input video
(S2016)

Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio as a letterbox

4:3-L 16:9 T
on top of a 4:3 coded frame.

Image with a 14:9 aspect ratio as a letterbox

4:3-L 14:9 T
on top of a 4:3 coded frame.

Image with an aspect ratio greater than 16:9

as a vertically centered letterbox in a 4:3
4:3-L> 16:9 coded frame.
* Main Unit does not crop or convert the
aspect ratio.

Image is full frame, with an aspect ratio the

4:3-F 4:3
same as that of the 4:3 coded frame.

Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio as a vertically

4:3-L 16:9 PRTD
centered letterbox in a 4:3 coded frame.

Image with a 14:9 aspect ratio as a vertically

4:3-L 14:9
centered letterbox in a 4:3 coded frame.

Image with a 4:3 aspect ratio and with an

4:3-F ALT 14:9
alternative 14:9 center in a 4:3 coded frame.

Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio and

4:3-L ALT 14:9 alternative 14:9 center as a vertically
centered letterbox in a 4:3 coded frame.

Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio and

alternative 4:3 center as a vertically
4:3-L ALT 4:3 centered letterbox in a 4:3 coded frame.
* Main Unit does not crop or convert the
aspect ratio.

75
◆ AFD 16:9 Code
MV-1640IP
Illustration in a 16:9
specified name Description
coded frame
(S2016)
Image with an aspect ratio greater than 16:9
as a vertically centered letterbox in a 16:9
16:9-L>16:9 coded frame.
* Main Unit does not crop or convert the
aspect ratio.

Image is full frame, with an aspect ratio the

16:9-F 16:9
same as that of the 16:9 coded frame.

Image with a 4:3 aspect ratio as a

16:9-P 4:3 horizontally centered pillarbox image in a
16:9 coded frame.

Image is full frame, with a 16:9 aspect ratio

16:9-F PRTD
and all image areas protected.

Image with a 14:9 aspect ratio as a

16:9-P 14:9 horizontally centered pillarbox image in a
16:9 coded frame.

Image with a 4:3 aspect ratio and alternative

16:9-P ALT 14:9 14:9 centered pillarbox image in a 16:9
coded frame.

Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio and

16:9-F ALT 14:9 alternative 14:9 center in a 16:9 coded
frame.

Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio and

16:9-F ALT 4:3
alternative 4:3 center in a 16:9 coded frame.

76
6-8-3. AFD Code Abbreviations
◆ SMPTE 2016-3 AFD code abbreviations
In a 4:3 coded frame In a 16:9 coded frame
AFD
AFD Code name Description AFD Code name Description Code
*1 *1
Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 0000
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0001
Full frame 16:9 image,
4:3-L 16:9 T Letterbox 16:9 image, at top of 16:9-F 16:9 *3 the same as the coded 0010
the coded frame frame
Letterbox 14:9 image, at top of Pillarbox 14:9 image,
4:3-L14:9 T the coded frame 16:9-P 14:9 *4 horizontally centered in 0011
the coded frame
Letterbox image with an aspect Letterbox image with
ratio greater than 16:9, an aspect ratio greater
4:3-L>16:9 16:9-L>16:9 than 16:9, vertically 0100
vertically centered in the coded centered in the coded
frame frame
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0101
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0110
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 0111
Full frame 4:3 image, the same Full frame 16:9 image,
4:3-F 4:3 *2 16:9-F 16:9 *3 the same as the coded 1000
as the coded frame frame
Pillarbox 4:3 image,
4:3-F 4:3 *2 Full frame 4:3 image, the same 16:9-P 4:3 horizontally centered in 1001
as the coded frame the coded frame
Letterbox 16:9 image, vertically Full frame 16:9 image,
4:3-L16:9PRTD centered in the coded frame 16:9-F PRTD with all image areas 1010
with all image areas protected protected
Letterbox 14:9 image, vertically Pillarbox 14:9 image,
4:3-L 14:9 centered in the coded frame 16:9-P 14:9 *4 horizontally centered in 1011
the coded frame
Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 1100
Pillarbox 4:3 image,
4:3-F ALT14:9 Full frame 4:3 image, with 16:9-P ALT14:9 with alternative 14:9 1101
alternative 14:9 center center
Full frame 16:9 image,
4:3-L ALT14:9 Letterbox 16:9 image, with 16:9-F ALT14:9 with alternative 14:9 1110
alternative 14:9 center center
Letterbox 16:9 image, with Full frame 16:9 image,
4:3-L ALT 4:3 alternative 4:3 center 16:9-F ALT4:3 with alternative 4:3 1111
center
*1 Text streams to be displayed when the title text display is set to AFD, or to be displayed
in the Information display.
*2, *3, and *4 are the same codes respectively.

77
6-9. Audio Level Meter
Audio level meters for up to 16 audio channels of input signals can be displayed for each window.
See Sec.4-4. “Audio Assignments” for details on audio assignments.

6-9-1. Audio Level Meter

Audio level meters for up to 16 audio channels can be displayed for selected audio input
signals as described in Sec.4-4. “Audio Assignments.”

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

No. Name Description

(1) Peak Level Peak levels can be set in the range of -30dBFS to 0dBFS.
If the level bar rises above the peak level, the exceeding
levels are displayed in red.
(2) Reference Level Reference levels can be set in the range of -60dBFS to -
1dBFS.
If the level bar rises above the reference level, exceeding
levels are displayed in yellow.
Bar levels below the reference levels are displayed in
green.
(3) Peak Hold Shows the maximum level reached for the set length of
time.
If a higher peak is reached, the display changes to indicate
the highest peak. When the peak hold time is reached
without any higher peak displayed, the current audio level
remains. If the peak hold time is set to 0 sec, no peak hold
display appears.
(4) Audio data indicator Indicates the presence of audio data.
See Sec. 6-9-3. “Audio Data Presence Indication” for
details.

78
6-9-2. Audio Level Meter Display Modes
Audio level meter display modes can be selected in the Layout Manager Window layout
window (below figure). The Window layout window can be displayed by double-clicking on the
video window on the editing area.

An audio level meter display mode can be selected from Vertical, Horizontal→→, Horizontal
←←, Horizontal→←, and Horizontal←→.

Horizontal→→, Horizontal←←, Horizontal→←, and Horizontal←→ display Audio(L) and

Audio(R) horizontally. Arrows indicate the direction in which audio level meters increase.

<Horizontal→→> <Horizontal←←>

<Horizontal→←> <Horizontal←→>

79
6-9-3. Audio Data Presence Indication
Which audio packet is lost can be verified by the audio control packet, active channel data,
and audio data packet indications in audio level meters as shown below.

◆ SD signals
Audio control packet Present Absent
Active channel data (ACT) Present Absent -
Audio data packet Pres. Abs. Pres. Abs. Pres. Abs.
Audio data presence indication green yellow amber black green black
Bar metering Yes No Yes No Yes No
Level over/silence alarm Yes No Yes No Yes No
indication
Loss alarm indication No Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Audio level meter display

◆ HD signals
Audio control packet Present Absent
Active channel data (ACT) Present Absent -
Audio data packet Pres. Abs. Pres. Abs. Pres. Abs.
Audio data presence indication green yellow amber black red black
Bar metering Yes No Yes No Yes No
Level over/silence alarm Yes No Yes No Yes No
indication
Loss alarm indication No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Audio level meter display

80
6-9-4. Audio Level Meter Settings
Audio level meter display settings can be entered in the level meter settings window of Layout
Manager as shown below. The setting window is opened by clicking Click to Setting▼ in the
audio setting box that is displayed by clicking the audio level meter icon in the window layout
window for respective windows.

Click Click to Setting▼

(1) (2)
(3)

(4)

(5)

Audio (L) Audio (R)

No. Name Description

(1) Display Format Select how to display audio level meters from 1+1, 2, 2+2, 4,
4+4, 8, 8+8, 6, and 6+2.
- 1+1, 2+2, 4+4, 8+8, and 6+2 displays the respective specified
number of audio level meters on Audio (L) and Audio (R).
- 2, 4, 8 and 6 displays the respective specified number of audio
level meters on Audio (L).
(2) Display Order Select how to display audio level meters from Sequential and
Alternating.
- Sequential displays audio level meters from the left side of
Audio (L).
- Alternating alternately displays audio level meters from the left
side of Audio (L) and Audio(R).
* Alternating is effective only with the Display format set to 1+1,
2+2, 4+4, or 8+8.
(3) Start CH 1/2 Select the first audio CH number to for sequential or alternating
assignment: The start channel for the first half is Start CH1 and
the start channel for the second half is Start CH2.
- Start CH 1: CH1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, and 15 are selectable.
- Start CH 2: None, CH1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, and 15 are
selectable.
* Start CH 2 can be set only with Display Format set to 1+1,
2+2, 4+4, 8+8 or 6+2.
(4) Level Meter
The number for each audio level meter.
Number
(5) Assigned Audio Displays the input source audio channel that is assigned to the
Channel level meter.

81
 IMPORTANT
Only level meter frames are displayed, without audio level metering, for channels
displayed with “---“ that do not have audio channels assigned.

To assign audio channels to the level meter as shown in illustrations below, configure as
shown in the table above each illustration.

<Vertical Audio Level Meter Display>

EX. 1)
Display Format 8 Display Order -
Start CH1 CH1 Start CH2 -

Ex. 2)
Display Format 4+4 Display Order Sequential
Start CH1 CH1 Start CH2 None

Ex. 3)
Display Format 4+4 Display Order Sequential
Start CH1 CH5 Start CH2 CH13

Ex. 4)
Display Format 4+4 Display Order Alternating
Start CH1 CH1 Start CH2 None

82
Ex. 5)
Display Format 4+4 Display Order Alternating
Start CH1 CH5 Start CH2 CH13

<Horizontal Audio Level Meter Display>

EX. 6)
Display Format 8 Display Order -
Start CH1 CH1 Start CH2 -

Ex. 7)
Display Format 4+4 Display Order Sequential
Start CH1 CH1 Start CH2 None

83
Ex. 8)
Display Format 4+4 Display Order Sequential
Start CH1 CH5 Start CH2 CH13

Ex. 9)
Display Format 4+4 Display Order Alternating
Start CH1 CH1 Start CH2 None

Ex. 10)
Display Format 4+4 Display Order Alternating
Start CH1 CH5 Start CH2 CH13

84
6-9-5. Audio Level Alarm
Audio alarms can be set for signal loss, over level and silence level states of audio signals.

(1)
AUDIO LOSS
OVER
SILENCE

CHANNEL1

(3)
(1) Alarm Indication
Indicates an alarm when an audio level alarm occurs in an audio channel.
1) Text / icon alarm indication
An alarm message (on the yellow matte background) or icon (yellow icons) will be
displayed. Display can be turned off.
Alarm Audio signal loss Over level Silence
Text AUDIO LOSS OVER SILENCE
Icon

2) Blinking borders alarm display

Blinks window borders. See Sec. 6-13. “Alarm Display Mode” for details.
3) Audio level meter display
If audio exceeds the set over level or silence level, the level meter frame of the
channel turns red and the bar meters blinks.

IMPORTANT
Note that alarms are not displayed if they occur in the channels that are not monitored
under audio level metering.
The audio loss alarm correctly works as described above for IP(ST2022)* / SDI inputs, but
not for IP (ST2110)* inputs. Alarms of channels that are not displayed in the level meter
may also be indicated for IP(ST2110) inputs, since audio errors of redundant streams are
also detected.
* IP streams can receive only on MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP.

(2) Alarm Detection

Alarm Description
Audio signal loss MV-1640IP:
IP inputs (ST2110) -Detects audio signal loss when audio packet
data is lost.
SDI inputs (MV-1640SDI option) and IP inputs (ST2022) - Detects
audio signal loss when the audio data in each channel is lost.
MV-3240:
Detects audio input signal loss for each channel.
MV-3240IP:
IP inputs (ST2110) -Detects audio signal loss when audio packet
data is lost.
IP inputs (ST2002) -Detects audio signal loss when the audio data
in each channel is lost.

85
 Alarm Description
Over level Detects an over level state when any of the audio channels exceed
the set over level for a certain period of time.
Silence level Detects a silence level state when any of the audio channels exceed
the set silence level for a certain period of time.
See Sec. 6-9-3. “Audio Data Presence Indication” for details on alarm detection and
display.

(3) Alarm Reset Mode

NONE No resetting. Displays an alarm until the audio returns to normal.
An alarm is reset when the reset signal is received, or audio returns
MANUAL
to normal.
An alarm is reset when the reset signal is received, or the specified
TIME
alarm display duration elapses.

IMPORTANT
The Main Unit proceeds with alarm detection when the unit is powered on or an alarm
parameter setting is changed.
Alarm resetting does not take effect if the relevant alarm reset mode is set to NONE.

6-9-6. Silence (Over Level) Alarm Example

(Ex. 1) Alarm reset mode is set to NONE.
Set as shown on the table below in System > Alarm > Audio in Controller screen of Layout
Manager.
Alarm Reset Mode None
Alarm Threshold -50dBFS
Audio Silence
Detection Time 5 seconds
* Alarm display remains ON as long as an alarm is detected.

Alarm display ON
④ ⑤
Alarm display OFF

③
Audio level

Silence level

① ② ⑤
④
Time course (s)
0 5 6 8 13 23

Time course Alarm detection status

1 5 seconds Silence level status is detected.
Audio is recovered from silence level status.
2 6 seconds Audio is below the silence level for less than 5 seconds; therefore, the
alarm display is not turned on.
3 8 seconds Silence level status is detected.
Audio is below the silence level for more than 5 seconds; therefore, the
4 13 seconds
alarm display is turned on.
5 23 seconds Audio is recovered; therefore, the alarm display is turned off.

86
(Ex. 2) Alarm display duration is set to longer than 1 second.
Set as shown on the table below in System > Alarm > Audio in Controller screen of Layout
Manager.
Alarm Reset Mode Time
Alarm Threshold -50dBFS
Audio Silence Alarm Duration 10 seconds
Detection Time 5 seconds

Alarm display ON
④ ⑥
Alarm display OFF

③ Audio level

Silence level

① ② ⑤ ⑥
④
Time course (s)
0 5 6 8 13 15 23

Time course Alarm detection status

1 5 seconds Silence level status is detected.
2 6 seconds Audio is recovered from silence level status. Audio is below the silence level
for less than 5 seconds; therefore, the alarm display is not turned on.
3 8 seconds Silence level status is detected.
4 13 seconds Audio is below the silence level for more than 5 seconds; therefore, the alarm
display is turned on.
5 15 seconds Audio is recovered from silence level status. The alarm display remains on,
since it is less than 10 seconds from when the alarm display began.
6 23 seconds 10 seconds have passed from the start of alarm display; therefore, the alarm
display is turned off.

6-9-7. Audio Signal Loss Alarm Example

(Ex. 1) Alarm reset mode is set to NONE.
Set as shown on the table below in System > Alarm > Audio in Controller screen of Layout
Manager.
Alarm Reset Mode None
Audio Loss Alarm Duration 5 seconds
* Alarm display remains ON as long as an alarm is detected.
Alarm display ON
Alarm display OFF

① Audio ③
Audio
signal signal Audio signal
loss loss
② ④
Time course
0 5 10 15 20 25 (s)

Time course Alarm detection status

1 5 seconds Audio signal loss is detected. Alarm display is turned on.
2 10 seconds The audio signal is recovered. Alarm display is turned off.
3 15 seconds Audio signal loss is detected. Alarm display is turned on.
4 20 seconds The audio signal is recovered. Alarm display is turned off.

87
 (Ex. 2) Alarm display duration is set to longer than 1 second.
Set as shown on the table below in System > Alarm > Audio in Controller screen of Layout
Manager.
Alarm Reset Mode Time
Audio Loss Alarm Duration 3 seconds

Alarm display ON
② ⑥
Alarm display
OFF
① ④
Audio
signal Loss
loss Audio signal
③ ⑤
Time course
0 8 17 20 25 (s)
5 10 15

Time course Alarm detection status

1 5 seconds Audio signal loss is detected. Alarm display is turned on.
3 seconds have passed from the start of alarm display; therefore, the alarm
2 8 seconds
display is turned off.
3 10 seconds Audio signal is recovered.
4 15 seconds Audio signal loss is detected. Alarm display is turned on.
Audio signal is recovered. It is within 3 seconds from the start of alarm
5 17 seconds
display; therefore, the alarm display has remained on.
3 seconds have passed from the start of alarm display; therefore, the alarm
6 18 seconds
display is turned off.

6-10. Closed Captioning

The MV-1640IP supports 3 closed caption standards (CEA608 CC, S334-1 CC SD, and CEA708
CC HD) for IP input (ST2022) and SDI input. The MV-3240 supports the same 3 standards for all
SDI inputs. The MV-3240IP supports 2 closed caption standards (S334-1 CC SD and CEA708 CC
HD) for IP input (ST2022). The alarm and status can be displayed for closed caption data
embedded in these inputs.
See Secs. 5-3-4. “SDI Ancillary Block Settings,” 6-3-9. “Closed Caption,” and 6-7-3-9. “Closed
Caption” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

◆ Overview of CC standards
CEA608 CC Closed caption data is embedded in line 21 in luminance level signal of
525/59.94i video signals.
Originally used for analog composite signals. The MV-1640IP/MV-3240
can detect CEA608CC data in SD-SDI signals. Detection in analog Y/C,
and YCbCr signals is not supported. The MV-3240IP cannot detect
CEA608CC data
S334-1 CC SD Data packet closed caption standard for SD-SDI, as defined by DID and
SDID, in ancillary data. The MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP can detect
the data in 525/59.94i video signals.
CEA708 CC HD Data packet closed caption standard for HD-SDI, as defined by DID and
SDID, in ancillary data. The MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP can detect
the data in 1080/59.94i and 720/59.94p video signals.
Refer to SMPTE standard documents for details.

NOTE
The MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP closed caption feature supports only status data
detection. Closed captioned data displays are not supported.

88
6-10-1. Closed Caption Data Alarm Display
The closed caption data loss alarm (CC loss alarm) can be displayed.

(1)
CC LOSS

CHANNEL1

1) Alarm indication
Indicates an alarm when closed caption data loss occurs.

(1) Text/icon alarm display

Displays a text string (with yellow background) or icon (a yellow bitmap).

Text CC LOSS

Icon

(2) Blinking border alarm display

Blinks window borders when an alarm occurs in a window. See Sec. 6-13. “Alarm
Display Mode” for details.

2) Alarm Detection: Detects an alarm when closed caption data loss occurs.

3) Alarm Reset Mode

NONE No resetting. Displays an alarm until the audio returns to normal.
Resets an alarm when the reset signal is received, or audio returns to
MANUAL
normal.
Resets an alarm when the reset signal is received, or the specified
TIME
alarm display duration elapses.

IMPORTANT
The MV-1640IP/MV-3240 performs alarm detection when the unit is powered on or an
alarm parameter setting is changed.
Alarm reset does not occur if the alarm reset mode is set to NONE.

89
6-10-2. CC Loss Alarm Example
(Ex. 1) Alarm reset mode is set to NONE.
Set as shown on the table below in System > Alarm > Audio in Controller screen of Layout
Manager.
Closed Caption Loss Alarm Alarm Reset Mode None
* Alarm display remains ON as long as an alarm is detected.

Alarm display ON

Alarm display OFF

① ③
CC loss CC loss CC data

② ④

Time course
0 5 10 15 20 25 (s)

Time course Alarm detection status

1 5 seconds CC loss is detected. Alarm display is turned on.
2 10 seconds CC data is recovered. Alarm display is turned off.
3 15 seconds CC loss is detected. Alarm display is turned on.
4 20 seconds CC data is recovered. Alarm display is turned off.

(Ex. 2) Alarm display duration is set to longer than 1 second.

Set as shown on the table below in System > Alarm > Audio in Controller screen of Layout
Manager.
Alarm Reset Mode Time
Closed Caption Loss Alarm
Alarm Duration 3 seconds

Alarm display ON
② ⑥
Alarm display OFF

① ④
CC loss loss CC data

③ ⑤

Time course
0 5 8 10 15 17 20 25 (s)

Time course Alarm detection status

1 5 seconds CC loss is detected. Alarm display is turned on.
3 seconds have passed from the start of alarm display; therefore,
2 8 seconds
the alarm display is turned off.
3 10 seconds CC data is recovered.
4 15 seconds CC loss is detected. Alarm display is turned on.
CC data is recovered. It is within 3 seconds from the start of alarm
5 17 seconds
display; therefore, the alarm display has remained on.
3 seconds have passed from the start of alarm display; therefore,
6 18 seconds
the alarm display is turned off.

90
6-10-3. Closed Caption Data Status Indication
Closed caption data states (CC status) can be displayed.

(1)

CC DET

CHANNEL1

(1) Text/ icon display

Displays a status text (with green background) or icon (a green bitmap) when closed
caption data is detected.

Text CC DET

Icon

(2) Display initiation

Starts status display when closed caption data is detected.

IMPORTANT
The MV-1640IP/MV-3240 performs closed caption data detection when the unit is
powered on or an alarm parameter setting is changed.

6-10-4. CC Status Display Example

* The CC status display remains ON as long as CC is being detected.
Status display ON

Status display
OFF
① ③
CC CC CC data
detected detected

② ④

Time course (s)

0 5 10 15 20 25

Time course CC data detection status

1 5 seconds CC data is detected. The status display is turned on.
2 10 seconds CC data is lost. The status display is turned off.
3 15 seconds CC data is detected. The status display is turned on.
4 20 seconds CC data is lost. The status display is turned off.

91
6-11. Video Alarm
On-screen video signal alarms such as those for signal loss, freeze, luminance level, black level
and CRC error are supported.

VIDEO LOSS
FREEZE
LUMA
BLACK
CRC ERROR
2SI LINK
2SI FORMAT

CHANNEL1

(1) Alarm Display

Indicates an alarm in a window in which a video alarm occurs.
1) Text/Icon alarm Indication
The alarm message (on the red matte background) or icon (red bitmap) will be displayed
in a window if the window is in a video alarm state.
Alarm Video signal loss Video freeze Luminance level Black level CRC error
Text VIDEO LOSS FREEZE LUMA BLACK CRC ERROR
Icon
Alarm 2SI link error 2SI format error
Text 2SI LINK 2SI FORMAT
Icon

2) Blinking borders alarm display

Blinks window borders when an alarm occurs in a window. See Sec. 6-13. “Alarm Display
Mode” for details.

(2) Alarm Detection

Alarm Description
IP input signals of MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP: Detected when video packet
Video signal data is lost for a certain period of time.
loss SDI input signal (MV-1640SDI option installed MV-1640IP or MV-3240):
Detected when video input signal is lost for a certain period of time.
Detects video freeze when frames are determined to be exactly the
same by computing active picture CRC values of the input 3G/HD/SD-
SDI (*) signal.
Two modes are available: Y/C detection and Y detection. Y detection
Video freeze mode is effective for images in which only chrominance components are
different in frames due to picture enlargement or compression.
(When Y detection mode is selected, ineffective bit number is settable.)
* SD-SDI supports SDI input signal only.
Luminance Detects a luminance level alarm state when the luminance level of an
level input signal exceeds the set level for a certain period of time.
Detects a black level alarm state when the black level of an input signal
Black level
exceeds the set level for a certain period of time.

92
 Detects CRC (*) error state.
* In case of IP input signals of MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP, network jitter and
wander are absorbed inside. If a sudden change occurs that exceeds
CRC error
the tolerance of the internal genlock circuit, a CRC error is detected.
The network jitter depends on the PTP for ST2110 and on each stream
for ST2022.
2SI link error Detects a connection order error in 4K 2SI input signals.
2SI format error Detects an input signal other than 2SI format.

IMPORTANT
 2SI alarms are indicated if input signals have the 2SI payload information and the signal
connection order or format is not matched (except Single Link 12/6G-SDI).
 2SI alarms are disabled when “Input Settings> Division Select” is set to “Manual Quad
- 2SI” in Layout Manager Controller. Refer to Sec. 5-3-1. “Division Select Settings” in
the Layout Manager User Manual for more details.
 2SI alarms can be indicated by Test and Icon alarms, but not on border alarms. They
do not support SNMP and LOG alarms.

(3) Alarm Reset Mode

NONE No resetting. Displays alarms until video returns to normal.
Alarms are reset when a reset signal is received, or video returns to
MANUAL
normal.
Alarms are reset when a reset signal is received, or the specified alarm
TIME
display duration elapses.

IMPORTANT
The MV-1640IP/MV-3240 performs alarm detection when the unit is powered on or an
alarm parameter setting is changed.
Alarm resets do not occur if the relevant alarm reset mode is set to NONE.
NONE is unselectable under Alarm Reset Mode for CRC error. Only MANUAL or TIME
can be selected.
If set to MANUAL, CRC errors caused by input signal connection, disconnection, or video
format changes will automatically reset themselves. When CRC errors are detected by
other causes, CRC error indications will continue to be displayed.

93
6-11-1. Luminance (Black Level) Alarm Example
(Ex. 1) Alarm reset mode is set to NONE.
Set as shown on the table below in Input Setting > Video (Alarm) in Controller screen of
Layout Manager.
Luma Level 90% * Settable in mV.

Set as shown on the table below in System > Alarm > Video in Controller screen of Layout
Manager.
Alarm Reset Mode None
Alarm Threshold 80%
Luma Level * Sets the capturing range of one video frame as 100%.
Detection Time 5 seconds
* Alarm display remains ON as long as an alarm is detected.
Alarm display ON

Alarm display
① OFF

Alarm area threshold

percentage
④
③ ⑤
Luminance data
② above the alarm
threshold level

Time course (s)

0 5 6 8 13 23

Time course Alarm detection status

A luminance level alarm is detected. (The luminance level is above
1 5 seconds the alarm threshold level in the larger area of the image than the
alarm area threshold percentage.)
The luminance level is above the alarm threshold level, but the
detected area is less than the alarm area threshold percentage. The
2 6 seconds
detected luminance level alarm state is shorter than 5 seconds,
therefore the alarm display is not turned on.
3 8 seconds A luminance level is detected.
The luminance level alarm continues for longer than 5 sec. The
4 13 seconds
alarm display is turned on.
The luminance level is above the alarm threshold level, but the
5 23 seconds detected area is less than the alarm area threshold percentage,
therefore the alarm display is turned off.

94
(Ex. 2) The alarm display duration is set to 10 seconds.
Set as shown on the table below in Input Setting > Video (Alarm) in Controller screen of
Layout Manager.
Luma Level 90%

Set as shown on the table below in System > Alarm > Video in Controller screen of Layout
Manager.
Alarm Reset Mode Time
Alarm Threshold 80%
Luma Level Alarm Duration 10 seconds
Detection Time 5 seconds

Alarm display ON

Alarm display
④ OFF
① ② ⑤
Alarm area threshold
percentage
③ Luminance data
above the alarm
⑥ threshold level
Time course (s)
0 5 6 8 13 15 23

Time course Alarm detection status

A luminance level alarm is detected. (The luminance level is above
1 5 seconds the alarm threshold level in the larger area of the image than the
alarm area threshold percentage.)
The luminance level is above the alarm threshold level, but the
detected area is less than the alarm area threshold percentage. The
2 6 seconds
detected luminance level alarm state is shorter than 5 seconds,
therefore the alarm display is not turned on.
3 8 seconds A luminance level alarm is detected.
The detected luminance level alarm continues for longer than 5 sec.
4 13 seconds
The alarm display is turned on.
The luminance level is above the alarm threshold level, but the
detected area is less than the alarm area threshold percentage.
5 15 seconds
However, 10 seconds have not yet elapsed since the alarm display
was turned on, therefore the alarm display remains on.
10 seconds have passed since the alarm display turned on;
6 23 seconds
therefore, the alarm display is turned off.

95
6-12. Timecode Loss Alarm Display (MV-1640IP/3240IP)
A timecode loss alarm is indicated if meta-packet loss in IP input signal is detected for MV-
160IP/MV-3240IP.
* SDI input signals (MV-1640SDI option required) and IP (ST2022) input signals are not
supported.

TC LOSS

CHANNEL1

(1) Text/ Alarm icon Indication

If a timecode loss alarm is detected, it is indicated using the "TC LOSS" text with yellow
background or a yellow alarm icon.

Alarm TC LOSS
Text indication TC LOSS
Icon indication

6-13. Alarm Display Mode

Video, audio and closed caption loss alarms can be displayed in 3 different modes.

Test/ Icon Displays alarms using text or icons.

Border Blinking Blinks video window borders when an alarm is detected in the window.

To select Alarm Display mode, go to System > Alarm > Display in Layout Manger - Controller.
See Sec 5-12-5-1. “Display” in the Layout Manager User Manual.

◆ Alarm Reset
<Layout Manager>
To reset alarms, press Alarm Reset on the top right of Layout Manager - Controller screen.

96
 6-13-1. Blinking Border Alarm Display
Blinks video window borders when an alarm is detected in the window. The color for the
blinking borders can be selected. See Sec. 5-12-5-1 “Display” in the Layout Manager User
Manual.
Border Border

Image Image
An alarm
is detected

Tally frame Black area Blinks in the specified Black area

blinking color/border color.

IMPORTANT
 If Frame Color for No Tally is set to Border Color and tally input is OFF, the displayed
border color tally frame does not support the border flashing alarm display.

6-14. Ancillary Time Code (ATC) Display

The ancillary time code (ATC) can be displayed for 3G-SDI, HD-SDI, SD-SDI and IP inputs. The
detection mode can be selected from AUTO, LTC, and VITC. If both ATC (LTC) and ATC (VITC)
are detected in an input signal while the detection mode is set to AUTO, ATC (VITC) will be
displayed.
Ancillary time code

HH:MM:SS:FF

Source 1

Ancillary Time Code is displayed as HH (hours), MM (minutes), SS (seconds), FF (frames). If there

is no Ancillary Time Code data, the display appears as [Link].

IMPORTANT
- DVITC is not supported.
- Time code that is input to the LTC IN connector cannot be displayed.

97
6-15. Clock, Timer and Information Display
Up to 4 items can be displayed from clocks, count up/down timers, schedule timers and/or
information display. The time difference can also be set for each clock in 15-minute intervals in the
range of ± 23 hours and 45 minutes (only for clock displays). INTERNAL and LTC can be selected
for the analog/digital clock and schedule timer display to synchronize to.

◆ Clock display
 Analog clocks
1 2 3 4
Round - Time Square - Time Square (dark) - Square (light) -
Date/Time Date/Time

5 6
Round (dark) - Round (light) -
Date/Time Date/Time

 Digital clocks
1 2 3 4
Time (dark) Time (light) Date/Time (dark) Date/Time (light)

5 6 7 8
Time (dark) Time (light) Date/Time (dark) Date/Time (light)
12-hour display 12-hour display 12-hour display/Date 12-hour display/Date

<INTERNAL>
Synchronizes the clock display to the internal clock of the MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP.

<LTC>
Synchronizes the clock to the time code input to LTC IN. However, a delay will occur from the time
the time code is input to the clock display.

IMPORTANT
All displayed clocks update their time simultaneously by adjusting to the time standard of
information window 1. Therefore, clocks using a time standard (LTC or internal clock) different
from that of information window 1 may appear unsynced with its original time standard. See
Sec. 6-3-4. “Information” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

98
◆ Clock display format
YYYY: year HH: hour
YY: year (last 2 digits) mm: minute
MM: month ss: second
DD: day EEE: day of week
No. Format No. Format
01 YYYY/MM/DD HH:mm:ss 22 EEE/MM/DD/YYYY HH:mm:ss
02 MM/DD/YYYY HH:mm:ss 23 EEE/DD/MM/YYYY HH:mm:ss
03 DD/MM/YYYY HH:mm:ss 24 EEE/YY/MM/DD HH:mm:ss
04 YY/MM/DD HH:mm:ss 25 EEE/MM/DD/YY HH:mm:ss
05 MM/DD/YY HH:mm:ss 26 EEE/DD/MM/YY HH:mm:ss
06 DD/MM/YY HH:mm:ss 27 EEE-YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
07 YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss 28 EEE-MM-DD-YYYY HH:mm:ss
08 MM-DD-YYYY HH:mm:ss 29 EEE-DD-MM-YYYY HH:mm:ss
09 DD-MM-YYYY HH:mm:ss 30 EEE-YY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
10 YY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss 31 EEE-MM-DD-YY HH:mm:ss
11 MM-DD-YY HH:mm:ss 32 EEE-DD-MM-YY HH:mm:ss
12 DD-MM-YY HH:mm:ss 33 [Link] HH:mm:ss
13 [Link] HH:mm:ss 34 [Link] HH:mm:ss
14 [Link] HH:mm:ss 35 [Link] HH:mm:ss
15 [Link] HH:mm:ss 36 [Link] HH:mm:ss
16 [Link] HH:mm:ss 37 [Link] HH:mm:ss
17 [Link] HH:mm:ss 38 [Link] HH:mm:ss
18 [Link] HH:mm:ss 39 YYYY 年 MM 月 DD 日 HH 時 mm 分 ss 秒(曜日)
19 YYYY 年 MM 月 DD 日 HH 時 mm 分 40 YY 年 MM 月 DD 日 HH 時 mm 分 ss 秒(曜日)
ss 秒
20 YY 年 MM 月 DD 日 HH 時 mm 分 ss 秒 41 YYYY/MM/DD HH 時 mm 分 ss 秒(曜日)
21 EEE/YYYY/MM/DD HH:mm:ss 42 YY/MM/DD HH 時 mm 分 ss 秒(曜日)

Examples:

<No.9> <No.19>

* See Sec. 5-12-4-1. “Clock - General” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details on
settings.

◆ Count up/down timer, and schedule timer

Count up/down and schedule timers can be displayed for Timer 1 to 4 by adding an information
window and selecting timer under Function in the Window layout window. Counting mode and
display mode can be set for each timer.
See Sec. 5-10. “Information Window Settings,” and 6-3-4. “Information” in the Layout Manager
User Manual for details.

Examples:

<Count up/down timer> <Schedule timer>

99
◆ Count 0 Stop
When using a countdown timer (Count up/down timer with minus (-) value), whether to
continue counting after the countdown reaches 0 can be set.
To stop counting at 0, select Enable. Select Disabled to continue counting over 0.
See Sec. 5-12-4-4. “Timer” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

Count down Count 0 stop Count up

-00: 00: 00: 03 99: 59: 59: 97
-00: 00: 00: 02 99: 59: 59: 98
-00: 00: 00: 01 99: 59: 59: 99
00: 00: 00: 00 Stops 00: 00: 00: 00
00: 00: 00: 01 00: 00: 00: 01

◆ Up/Down Timer Count Types

Count type is selectable from two types - Normal Count and One Second Count.
Normal Count
Ex.) If set to -2 seconds
Up/Down Timer Display Description
-2.00 -2.00 is displayed when the count is first started and it
immediately changes to -1 second values.
-1.99 Displays consecutive -1 second values for one second
-1.98 period.
-1.97
:
:
-1.01
-1.00
-0.99 Displays consecutive -0 second values for one second
-0.98 period.
-0.97
:
:
-0.01
-0.00
0.00 Displays consecutive 0 second values for one second
0.01 period.
0.02
:
:
0.98
0.99
1.00 Displays consecutive 1 second values for one second
1.01 period.
1.02

1.98
1.99

100
 One Second Count
Ex.) If set to -2 seconds
Up/Down Timer Display Description
-2.00 Count starts from 00 if less than 2 seconds.
-2.01 Displays consecutive -2 second values for one second period.
-2.02
:
:
-2.98
-2.99
-1.00 Displays consecutive -1 second values for one second period.
-1.01
-1.02
:
:
-1.98
-1.99
0.00 Displays consecutive 0 second values for one second period.
0.01
0.02
:
:
0.98
0.99
1.00 Displays consecutive 1 second values for one second period.
1.01
1.02
:
:
1.98
1.99
2.00 Displays consecutive 2 second values for one second period.
2.01
2.02
:
:
2.98
2.99

◆ Information Display
Information windows can be used to display various items of information by selecting
Information under Function in the Window layout window. Information to be displayed can
be selected from 7 types, such as logs, or Main Unit information, for 1 to 4 information displays
to be separately displayed.
See Sec. 8. “Information Display” in this manual and Sec. 6-7-3-3. “Information” in the Layout
Manager User Manual for details.

101
6-16. SNTP - Internal Clock Correction via Network
The internal clock that is used for clock displays can be corrected using an SNTP server.
SNTP supports correction only in unicast (1x1) mode, not in multicast or any other cast mode.
See Sec. 5-12-4-2. “Clock - Internal/SNTP” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details on
settings.

IMPORTANT
- DNS is not supported.
- Consult your network administrator to obtain the IP address for the SNTP server.

Setting Example: To set to Japanese Local time

1) Every hour
Send a request for the standard
time to [Link]/101. 3) Add 9 hours to the received
standard time to adjust to the
local time, then set to the internal
2) Send the standard time to clock.
[Link].
SNTP server (Primary) Multi Viewer (SNTP client)
IP address: [Link] Main Unit IP address: [Link]
SNTP server IP address (P): [Link]
SNTP server (Secondary) SNTP server IP address (S): [Link]
IP address: [Link] Time zone: UTC +9 hours
Interval: 3600 sec (1 hour)
Sync Range: 15 hours *

The SNTP server can have redundant control for Primary and Secondary.
If, for some reason, it is not possible to obtain time information from the SNTP server on the Primary
side, the time information obtained from the SNTP server on the Secondary side will be used for
correction.

* If the sum of the received standard time and 9 hours (for the local time adjustment) is either
15 hours late or early from the internal clock time, synchronization will not occur. The internal
clock will synchronize to any time given from the SNTP server if Sync Range is set to 0.

6-16-1. Time Zone

The SNTP server standard time is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
To synchronize the internal clock to the standard time, set a UTC offset for the local time. The
time differences for major cities are as follows. Look on the web for UTC offsets for other time
zones.
Los Angeles UTC -8 hours
New York, Washington UTC -5 hours
London UTC 0 hour
Paris UTC +1 hour
Beijing UTC +8 hours
Tokyo UTC +9 hours

102
6-17. Logo / Background Image Display
Images registered in the Layout Manager can be saved and displayed on screen as Logo, Text
Logo or Background
Up to eight images can be saved as Logo. One 4K or four 2K images can be saved.
Text Logo can hold the number of input channels (max. 32) and 8 (shared). (See Sec. 8. “Logo
Register Screen” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.)
A total of four logos and one 4K or four 2K background images can be displayed on a screen at the
same time. Logo and background images can be used to create more effective monitoring screen
displays.
Background can set the background color without registering background data. See the Layout
Manager User Manual Sec. 5-12-1-2 “Video” for details on setting background color.

IMPORTANT
The MV-1640IP/MV-3240 may take longer to start up depending on the amount of logo and
background image data that is saved. Logo and background images take some time to be
displayed after their registration. Maximum pixel size for Logo is 1024 x 512.
Maximum pixel size for Text Logo is 1024 x 128.

<Display example 1 with a logo and background (Traffic observation)>

Logo Background Layout setting

<Display example 2 with a logo and background (Production room monitor)>

Logo Background Layout setting

103
6-18. Safety Area Marker
Safety area markers for broadcasting productions can be displayed in each window. Display
settings are configured and conducted via Layout Manager as shown below. See Sec. 5-3-2. “Video
Block Settings,” and Sec. 6-3-11. “Safety Area Marker” in the Layout Manager User Manual for
details.

IMPORTANT
Safety area markers will not be displayed if no input signal is present.
Because safety area markers are calculated from the video image area being displayed, their
aspect ratios, and sizes may be inaccurate if the video image is displayed in FitScreen mode or
cropped.

Layout Editor Screen > Window Layout Screen

SafetyAreaMarker Display (ON/OFF) Marker type selection

Display Type (Box/Cut, see sec. 6-18-1) Marker types can be selected
Color (Marker color selection) in the Window, Source, or
Format menu. (See Sec. 6-
Transparency (Marker transparency selection) 18-2)
Marker Type
Window Aspect
Size

Window (Video window settings)

Controller Screen

Controller Slot/Input Video Safety Area Marker Source

(Settings for input source
channels 1-16)
System Settings Format Safety Area Marker Format
(Settings for each format)

<Example Display>
Window Mode Input format ASPECT setting SIZE setting
Window 1 BOX 1080/59.94i FULL 80%
Window 2 BOX 1080/59.94i 4:3 80%
Window 3 CUT 525/59.94i 16:9 80%
Window 4 CUT 1080/59.94i 14:9 90%

104
 Window 1 Window 2
Window 1 Window 2

Window 3 Window 4

Black Area Black Area

IMPORTANT
Because safety area markers are calculated from the video image area being displayed, their
aspect ratios and sizes may be inaccurate if the video image is displayed in FitScreen mode or
cropped.

6-18-1. Display Type

BOX and CUT modes are selectable. (Color and transparency can be set for either mode.)

<BOX mode >

Shows the safety area with a boundary box.

<CUT mode >

Masks areas other than the safety area.

<BOX> Safety Area Marker <CUT>

105
 6-18-2. Marker Type
<Source>
Displays a safety area marker with the aspect ratio and size set for respective input source.
<Format>
Displays a safety area marker with the aspect ratio and size set for respective input source
formats.
<Window>
Displays a safety area marker with the aspect ratio and size set in window settings.

6-18-3. Aspect/Size
<Aspect>
Allows you to set aspect ratios (FULL/ 16:9/ 14:9/ 13:9/ 4:3/ Free) for a safety area marker
under Source, Format, and Window settings separately.
<Size>
Allows you to set the safety area marker size from 70 to 100% with the aspect ratio selected
under Aspect.
If Free is selected in Aspect, Size is disabled. In this case, set top/ bottom/ left/ right location
for safety area marker display location.

6-19. Auto Sequence

6-19-1. Multi-window Auto Sequence
Pressing AUTO in Multi-window mode displays successively preset layouts saved in the MV-
1640IP/MV-3240 under specified order and interval settings. Order and interval settings are
adjustable.
For details on settings, see Sec. 5-12-2. “Auto Sequence” in the Layout Manager User Manual.
For details on setting procedures, see Sec. 5-3-4. “Multi-window Display (Layout
Selection/Auto Sequence).”

Ex.) When setting Layout 1 and 3 to switch in 5-second intervals.

Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout 3 Layout 1

5 sec 5 sec 5 sec

106
6-19-2. Full Screen Auto Sequence
Pressing AUTO in Full Screen mode displays successively input sources. Order and Interval
settings are adjustable. For details on settings, see Sec. 5-12-2. “Auto Sequence” in the Layout
Manager User Manual. For details on setting procedures, see Sec. 5-3-5. “Full Screen Display.”

Ex.) When input sources 1-4 switch in 3-second intervals.

(Upper: Loss Skip OFF, Bottom: Loss Skip ON)

SRC1 SRC2 SRC3 SRC4

Video loss input

SRC1 SRC2 SRC4 SRC1

3 sec 3 sec 3 sec

The movie freezes for a moment (Freeze Process) when switching the screen for both Multi-
window / Full Screen auto sequences, field freeze or frame freeze is applied according to the
FS Mode setting (see Sec. 3-3-1. “FS Mode”).

6-19-3. Window Auto Sequence

When in Multi-screen mode, selecting a window and pressing AUTO allows you to sequentially
display input sources on the window in the set order, at the set intervals. Refer to the Layout
Manager User Manual to see Sec. 5-12-2. “Auto Sequence” for Window Auto Sequence
settings and Sec. 5-3-9. “USER Function” for Window Auto Sequence management.

(Example) Input sources sequentially displayed on WINDOW1 at 10 seconds intervals

WINDOW 1

SRC 1 SRC 2 SRC 2 SRC 2 SRC 1 SRC 2

10 秒 10 秒

SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 3 SRC 4 SRC 3 SRC 4

IMPORTANT
 To skip input loss sources in Window Auto Sequences, set the loss skip setting to ON.
See Sec 5-12-2. “Auto Sequence” in the Layout Manager User Manual for the details.
 If a window is temporarily added to Window Auto Sequence by front panel operation or
external commands, it will be removed from the Sequence by changing settings such
as window layouts.
 Window Auto Sequence is not supported on 4K Windows.
 Video images may appear distorted when changing sources between different
resolutions, for example, changing from HD (1920x1080) to SD (720x486)
 If displaying a 4K video on 2K or 1K Window, it is processed as 1920x1080.

107
6-20. LPF (Low Pass Filter) Settings
LPF can be set to each source. See Sec. 5-3-2 “Video Block Setting” in the Layout Manager User
Manual for details.

Default: Reduction filter ratio: High

Sharpens the outline.
Low: Reduction filter ratio: Low
Does not sharpen the outline.

6-21. Simplified SDR/ HDR (HLG) Conversion

The Simplified Dynamic Range Conversion feature allows you to convert to and from HDR (High
Dynamic Range) and SDR (Standard Dynamic Range) signals with specifications as follows.

IMPORTANT
- Dynamic Range Conversions support only HLG (Hybrid Log Gamma).
- Dynamic Ranges can be set for each input and output.
- Dynamic Range conversion automatically changes the signal color space (gamut):
Converting to SDR changes the video color space to BT.709 and converting to HDR
changes the video color space to BT.2020.
- Accessories such as clocks and tallies are automatically converted into the one set in the
Output Dynamic Range. (DR level settings are available.)
- The Live Viewer ignores the respective Dynamic Range conversion settings and displays
video sources and accessories without changing their Dynamic Range. Live Viewer images
are normally in SDR and cannot show HDR sources properly.
- Dynamic Ranges are roughly converted, inaccurately, by simple luminance and saturation
adjustment, with converted images appearing different from those input. For full-featured
dynamic range conversion, use FOR-A frame synchronizers.
- To display HDR images properly, an HDR compliant monitor is required.

108
Conversion settings should be entered under input and output settings in the Layout Manager
Controller screen as shown below.

◆ Input Setting
Dynamic Range - Convert and Input Select in the [Dynamic Range] setting screen (See Sec.
5-3-2. “Video Block Settings” in the Layout Manager User Manual.)

◆ Output Setting
HDR/SDR Output Setting and HDR Out Level Control in the [Dynamic Range] setting screen
(See Sec. 5-4-2. “Dynamic Range Settings” in the Layout Manager User Manual.)

The following conversion examples show how to convert between dynamic ranges.
Input video Output video
Conversion (Color space) Example
dynamic range dynamic range
OFF SDR (BT.709) Ex. 3
SDR
ON HDR (HLG) (BT.2020) Ex. 2
ON SDR (BT.709) Ex. 1
HDR (HLG)
OFF HDR (HLG) (BT.2020) Ex. 3
HDR (Other than HLG) OFF HDR (Other than HLG) (BT.2020) Ex. 3

Ex. 1) HDR (HLG) to SDR Conversion

HDR (HLG) input sources are converted to SDR and output through SDI Out 1.
MV-1640IP/MV-3240
HDR(HLG) SRC01 /MV-3240IP SDR Monitor

HDR(HLG) SRC02 SRC01 SRC02

SDI Out1
SDR SRC03 SRC03 SRC04

SDR SRC04

Input setting Output Setting

Source Convert Input Select Dynamic Range Setting
1 ON HDR SDI OUT1 SDR (default)
2 ON HDR
3 OFF -
4 OFF -

Ex. 2) SDR to HDR (HLG) Conversions

SDR input sources are converted to HDR and the luminance and saturation level can be selected
in 11 steps. Accessories such as clocks and tallies are generated according to the output dynamic
range, however the luminance and saturation level can be selected.
MV-1640IP/MV-3240
HDR (HLG) Monitor
HDR(HLG) SRC01 /MV-3240IP
HDR(HLG) SRC02 SRC01 SRC02
SDI Out1
SDR SRC03 SRC03 SRC04

SDR SRC04

Input setting Output setting

Source Convert Input Select Dynamic Range Setting
1 OFF - SDI OUT1 HDR
2 OFF - HDR Out Level Control -6 to 4
3 ON SDR
4 ON SDR

109
Ex. 3) Unconverted Dynamic Range
If video dynamic ranges remain unconverted, (i.e., SDR input/ SDR output, HDR input/ HDR output),
HDR (PQ) images can be properly processed as shown below. In such cases, however,
accessories such as clocks and tallies are output in HLG.
MV-1640IP/MV-3240
HDR(PQ) SRC01 /MV-3240IP HDR (PQ) monitor

HDR(PQ) SRC02 SRC01 SRC02

SDI Out1
HDR(PQ) SRC03 SRC03 SRC04

HDR(PQ) SRC04

Input setting Output setting

Source Convert Input Select Dynamic Range Setting
1 to 4 OFF - SDI OUT1 HDR

110
7. Menu Operation
Submenus to set various settings can be accessed from the Main menu.
* The [>] in the menu screen indicates there is/are submenu(s) to be accessed.

IMPORTANT
While displaying a menu screen, Information Windows for all outputs will be invisible. After exiting
the menu, information will be visible.
During this time, setting changes from the Layout Manager are also disabled.

◆ Operation Example
(1) Hold down the MENU button at least 2 seconds MAIN MENU
to open the main menu.
1 FRONT FUNC SET ＞
(2) Use ↑ and ↓ buttons to select the menu, 2 AUDIO ＞
then press the ENTER button to display the 3 DATE/TIME ＞
menu below. 4 SNTP ＞
For instance, selecting [6 LAN >] and pressing 5 SNMP ＞
the ENTER button, the screen as shown below 6 LAN ＞
will be displayed. 7 AUTHENTICATION ＞
8 GENLOCK ＞
(3) To change LAN1 IP address, use ↑ and ↓ 9 VERSION & OPTION ＞
buttons to move the cursor to the item you want 10 VIEWER ＞
to change setting.

(4) Enter the first octet number using 1 to 10 (0) buttons, then press the ENTER button.
If a number button for the last digit is pressed, the cursor jumps to next octet.

(5) Press the ↓ button to move to the second octet. Enter the number and press the ENTER button.

(6) Similarly, enter the third and fourth octets.

(7) Press the MENU button to return to the main menu.

MV-1640IP MV-3240

LAN LAN
LAN1
IP ADDRESS [Link] IP ADDRESS [Link]
([Link]) SUBNET MASK 24bit ([Link])
SUBNET MASK 24bit ([Link]) GATEWAY [Link]
GATEWAY [Link] MAC ADDRESS 00-10-B1-14-30-01
MAC ADDRESS 00-10-B1-12-B0-01
(00-10-B1-12-C0-01)

LAN2
IP ADDRESS [Link]
SUBNET MASK 24bit ([Link])
GATEWAY [Link]
MAC ADDRESS 00-10-B1-12-D0-01

111
(8) Press the MENU button again. [SAVE CHANGE?] SAVE CHANGE?
dialog box opens.
(9) Select the YES button using ↑ and ↓ buttons, YES
then press the ENTER button. NO
The settings will now be reflected. CANCEL

7-1. Main Menu

Hold down the button at least 2 seconds to open the main menu.

MAIN MENU

1 FRONT FUNC SET ＞

2 AUDIO ＞
3 DATE/TIME ＞
4 SNTP ＞
5 SNMP ＞
6 LAN ＞
7 AUTHENTICATION ＞
8 GENLOCK ＞
9 VERSION & OPTION ＞
10 VIEWER ＞

◆ Operation
Button Function
↑ and ↓ Moves the cursor up and down.
ENTER Opens the selected menu page.
MENU Closes MAIN MENU and opens the SAVE CHANGE? dialog. If no setting has
been changed, closes MAIN MENU and exit menus.
(See Sec. 7-1-1. “SAVE CHANGE?” for details.)

◆ Parameters
Parameter Setting description Refer to
1. FRONT FUNC SET User button function Assignment 7-2
2. AUDIO Audio settings 7-3
3. DATE/TIME Date/Time settings 7-4
4. SNTP SNTP settings 7-5
5. SNMP SNMP status display 7-6
6. LAN LAN settings and display 0
7. AUTHENTICATION Authentication display 7-8
8. GENLOCK Genlock settings 7-9
9. VERSION & OPTION Version display, Option card installation status display 7-10
10. VIEWER Movie file transfer On/Off setting. 7-11

112
7-1-1. SAVE CHANGE?
The following message appears when exiting menus, if any menu changes have been made.

SAVE CHANGE?

YES
NO
CANCEL

To save the change, select the YES button using ↑ and ↓ buttons, then press the ENTER
button.
To cancel the change, select the NO button using ↑ and ↓ buttons, then press the ENTER
button.
To return to the main menu, select the CANCEL button using ↑ and ↓ buttons, then press
the ENTER button.

113
7-1-2. Menu Structure - Levels
1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level
MAIN MENU 1. FRONT FUNC SET USER1-3
2. AUDIO SDI1-4 GAIN/MUTE/PACKET
3. DATE/TIME CLOCK1 - 4
SET(INTERNAL) INTERNAL CLOCK
4. SNTP AUTO SYNC
UPDATE NOW
SNTP SVR ADDR(P)
SNTP SVR ADDR(S)
TIME ZONE
INTERVAL
SYNC RANGE
LAST UPDATE
LAST UPDATE STAT
PRIMARY STATUS
SECONDARY STATUS
5. SNMP SysName
SysLocation
SysContact
Enable Authen Trap
Read Only1 - 2
Dest Address(Trap1 - 2)
Sender Community(Trap1 - 2)
6. LAN IP ADDRESS (LAN1/LAN2)
SUBNET MASK (LAN1/LAN2)
GATEWAY (LAN1/LAN2)
MAC ADDRESS (LAN1/LAN2)
7. AUTHENTICATION AUTHENTICATION
ID
PASSWORD
8. GENLOCK GENLOCK SELECT
DELAY REDUCT
H PHASE
V PHASE
CASCADE
LOCK STATUS
REFERENCE
9. VERSION & OPTION Serial No, Version, Installation
information
10. VIEWER VIEWER PORT 1 - 2

◆ Operation
Button Function
↑, ↓ Moves the cursor up and down.
ENTER Accesses the submenu of the selected parameter indicated with [>].
* Goes 1 level down.
MENU Goes 1 level up.

114
7-2. FRONT FUNC SET
In MAIN MENU, move the cursor to [1 FRONT FUNC SET>], and press the ENTER button. The
following menu appears.
FRONT FUNC SET

USER1: NONE
USER2: NONE
USER3: NONE

NONE WIN SRC ASN LVP1 REC STR

LVP2 REC STR INFO1TYPE INFO2TYPE
INFO3TYPE INFO4TYPE

◆ Operation
Button Function
↑ and ↓ Moves the cursor up and down.
ENTER Accesses the submenu of the selected parameter.
MENU Returns to MAIN MENU.

◆ Parameters
Setting range
Parameter Description
(Default is highlighted)
NONE No function
(Window Source Assignment)
WIN SRC ASN
Assigns an input source to the selected window.
USER1-3 LVP1 REC STR (Live Viewer 1, 2 Recording Start)
LVP2 REC STR Starts recording on the selected Live Viewer.
INFO1TYPE
(Info Type 01-04 Selection)
|
Selects a type for Information Display / log scrolling
INFO4TYPE
See Sec.5-3-9. “USER Button Functions.”

Ex.) Assigns WIN SRC ASN to USER1 and LVP1 REC STR to USER2.
(1) Use ↑ and ↓ buttons to select USER1.
(2) Use ← and → buttons to select WIN SRC ASN.
(3) Use ↑ and ↓ buttons to select USER2.
(4) Use ← and → buttons to select LVP1 REC STR.
(5) Press the MENU button twice to open [SAVE CHANGE?] dialog box.
(6) Select SAVE and press the ENTER button.
The settings will now be reflected.

115
7-3. AUDIO
In the MAIN menu, move the cursor to [2 AUDIO >], and press the ENTER button. The following
menu appears.

AUDIO

GAIN MUTE PACKET

SDI1/HDMI 0.0 dB OFF ON
SDI2 0.0 dB OFF ON
SDI3 0.0 dB OFF ON
SDI4 0.0 dB OFF ON

◆ Operation
Button Function
↑ and ↓ Moves the cursor up and down.
← and → Changes the value of the selected parameter.
MENU Returns to MAIN MENU.

◆ Parameters
Parameter Setting range Description
(Default is highlighted)
SDI1-4 GAIN -20.0 to 20.0dB Allows you to adjust embedded audio gain
(0.1dB increments) settings for SDI OUT 1-4.
Default: 0.0dB
MUTE OFF, ON Allows you to set embedded audio mute
settings for SDI OUT 1-4.
PACKET OFF, ON Allows you to turn ON/OFF the audio
packet for SDI OUT 1-4.
HDMI output has the same settings as SDI output 1.

116
7-4. DATE/TIME
In the MAIN menu, move the cursor to [3 DATE/TIME >], and press the ENTER button. The
following menu appears.
DATE/TIME
CLOCK1 ：INTERNAL
CLOCK2 ：LTC
CLOCK3 ：INTERNAL
CLOCK4 ：INTERNAL
12/01/23 [Link]
SET/CANCEL

◆ Operation
Button Function
↑ and ↓ Moves the cursor up and down.
← and → Changes the value of the selected parameter.
1 to 10 (0) Internal clock mode: Enter the value for the selected parameter.
When Internal clock is selected Enters internal clock time setting mode.
Select SET and press ENTER to apply the
current time settings to the internal clock and
In Internal clock time setting exit the internal clock time setting mode.
ENTER
mode Select CANCEL and press ENTER to cancel
the current time settings and exit the internal
clock time setting mode.
When entering numbers Confirms the entered values
Returns to the Main menu. Internal clock mode: Cancels the date/time setting
MENU
being set, and returns to normal display mode.

◆ Parameters
Setting range
Parameter Description
(Default is highlighted)
Select the standard time.
INTERNAL INTERNAL: Uses the internal clock for the
CLOCK1-4 date/time display.
LTC LTC: Uses the LTC IN input time code for the
date/time display.
Year 01-79
Month 01-12
Internal Day 01-31 Allows you to adjust date and time settings for
clock Hour 00-23 the internal clock.
Minute 00-59
Second 00-59

IMPORTANT
If power is off for more than 60 hours, the date and time settings will be lost. In this case, set the
date and time again.

Ex.) Changes the internal clock date and time from 12/01/23 [Link] to 20/01/23 [Link].
(1) Use ↑ and ↓ to select the internal clock.(Displayed as 12/01/23 [Link] in the menu.)
(2) Press the ENTER button.
(3) Use the → button to select 12.
(4) Use 1 - 10(0) buttons to enter 20.
(5) Use the ↓ button to select SET.(Selecting CANCEL cancels current settings.)

117
7-5. SNTP
In the Main menu, move the cursor to [4 SNTP >], and press the ENTER button. The following
menu appears.
SNTP
AUTO SYNC ：ENABLE
UPDATE NOW
SNTP SVR ADDR(P) ：[Link]
SNTP SVR ADDR(S) ：[Link]
TIME ZONE ：+09H00M
INTERVAL ：64sec
SYNC RANGE ：15H
LAST UPDATE ：2012/03/22 [Link]
LAST UPDATE STAT ：OK
PRIMARY STATUS ：OK
SECONDARY STATUS ：COM ERR

◆ Operation
Button Function
↑ and ↓ Moves the cursor up and down.
← and → Changes the value of the selected parameter.
1 to 10 (0) Enter the value for the selected parameter.
ENTER Confirms the value that is entered by the number buttons.
MENU Returns to the MAIN MENU.

◆ Parameters
Setting range
Parameter Description
(Default: highlighted)
AUTO SYNC DISABLE, ENABLE Select enable or disable the SNTP function.
UPDATE NOW - Immediately performs the SNTP time correction.
SNTP SVR [Link] to Set the SNTP (Primary) server IP ADDRESS.
ADDR (P) [Link]
SNTP SVR [Link] to Set the SNTP (Secondary) server IP ADDRESS.
ADDR (S) [Link]
TIME ZONE -23H45M to 23H45M Specify the time difference to add to the received
(Default: 00H00M) SNTP server time (UTC) before applying the time
to the internal clock.
INTERVAL 60 to 86400 sec Set the interval of time correction.
(Default: 64 sec)
SYNC RANGE 0 to 24 H Allows you to limit the time difference to perform
(Default: 0H) SNTP time correction.
If the time difference between the SNTP server
and internal clock exceeds the limit, the received
SNTP server time is determined to be false.
When set to 0H, the time retrieved from the
server is effectively reflected no matter how much
the time differs from the internal clock.
LAST UPDATE - Displays the last time the time was corrected by
SNTP.
LAST UPDATE - Displays the status of the last SNTP time
STAT correction.
OK: Normally completed.
Error: Abnormal termination

118
 Setting range
Parameter Description
(Default: highlighted)
PRIMARY - Displays SNTP (Primary) server communication
STATUS status.
OK: Normally completed.
COMM ERR: Communication error
SYNC ERR: Sync range error
OVER ERR: Internal process error
SECONDARY - Displays SNTP (Secondary) server
STATUS communication status.
OK: Normally completed.
COMM ERR: Communication error
SYNC ERR: Sync range error
OVER ERR: Internal process error
NOT USED: Secondary server not used

7-6. SNMP
In the Main menu, move the cursor to [5 SNMP >], and press the ENTER button. The following
menu appears.

SNMP 1/2 SNMP 2/2

SnmpSystem TrapSettings
sysName: Trap1DestAdrs: 0. 0. 0. 0
SendComm:
sysLocation: Trap2DestAdrs: 0. 0. 0. 0
SendComm:
sysContact:

EnableAuthTrap:DISABLE
AccessCommunity
ReadOnly1:
ReadOnly2:

◆ Operation
Button Function
← and → Changes the value of the selected parameter.
MENU Return to MAIN MENU.

◆ Parameters
Item Description
Displays the unit name (MV-1640IP or MV-3240 or MV-3240IP) to be
sysName
monitored.
sysLocation Displays comments on the unit location.
sysContact Displays comments on the unit administrator.
Enable Authen Trap Displays whether the authentication failure traps are enabled or disabled.
Read Only 1,2 Displays the SNMP read-only community name.
Trap1,2 Dest
Displays the SNMP manager IP ADDRESS to which traps are sent.
Address
Trap1,2 Sender
Displays the SNMP manager community name to which traps are sent.
Community

IMPORTANT
Settings are applied after the Main Unit is restarted. Exit menus and restart the unit.

119
7-7. LAN
In the Main menu, move the cursor to [6 LAN >], and press the ENTER button. The following menu
appears.
MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP MV-3240

LAN LAN
LAN1
IP ADDRESS [Link] IP ADDRESS [Link]
([Link]) SUBNET MASK 24bit ([Link])
SUBNET MASK 24bit ([Link]) GATEWAY [Link]
GATEWAY [Link] MAC ADDRESS 00-10-B1-14-30-01
MAC ADDRESS 00-10-B1-12-B0-01
(00-10-B1-12-C0-01)

LAN2
IP ADDRESS [Link]
SUBNET MASK 24bit ([Link])
GATEWAY [Link]
MAC ADDRESS 00-10-B1-12-D0-01

◆ Operation
Button Function
↑ and ↓ Moves the cursor up and down.
← and → Changes the value of the selected parameter.
1 to 10 (0) Enter the value for the selected parameter.
ENTER Confirms the value entered by the number buttons.
MENU Returns to MAIN MENU.

◆ Parameters
Setting range
Parameter Description
(Default is highlighted)
[Link] to [Link]
IP ADDRESS
(LAN1 Default: [Link]) Set the LAN IP address.
(LAN1/LAN2)
(LAN2 Default: [Link])
SUBNET MASK Set the LAN connection subnet mask
0 to 30 (Default: 24)
(LAN1/LAN2) length.
Set the LAN gateway. Unnecessary if your
GATEWAY [Link] to [Link] network does not have a gateway.
(LAN1/LAN2) * “[Link]” indicates no gateway setting
is set. (LAN1)
MAC ADDRESS Displays the LAN MAC address.
-
(LAN1/LAN2) (LAN1/LAN2)

IMPORTANT
 LAN2 is displayed for MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP only.
 Settings are applied after the Main Unit is restarted. Exit menus and restart the unit.
 Consult your network administrator when setting network settings.
 The LAN2 setting cannot be changed on this MENU.
 The LAN2 cannot use the next IP address of LAN1. For example, if LAN1 is [Link],
1692.168.0.11 cannot be used.
 Host address bits in the IP address subnet mask may not all be set to 0 or 1. The first octet
of the IP address also should not be set to 127.
* The “IP ADDRESS CAN’T BE SET” or “GATEWAY CAN’T BE SET” error message will be
displayed if such an IP address is set.

120
7-8. AUTHENTICATION
In the Main menu, move the cursor to [7 AUTHENTICATION >], and press the ENTER button. The
following menu appears.
This menu allows you to set authentication for the PC connection via LAN using dedicated software,
web browser and LAN commands.

AUTHENTICATION

AUTHENTICATION ：ENABLE
ID ：ROOT
PASSWORD ：00000

◆ Operation
Button Function
MENU Returns to the MAIN MENU.

◆ Status display
Item Description
Select enable or disable authentication for the connection to a PC
AUTHENTICATION over a LAN to use dedicated software programs, Web browser,
and/or LAN commands.
ID Displays the authentication ID.
PASSWORD Displays the authentication password.
* See Sec. 5-13-2. “Authentication Settings” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details on
setting the ID and password.

7-9. GENLOCK
In the Main menu, move the cursor to [8 GENLOCK >], and press the ENTER button. The following
menu appears.
GENLOCK

GENLOCK SELECT : REFERENCE LOCK

DELAY REDUCT : OFF
H PHASE :0
V PHASE :0
CASCADE : OFF
LOCK STATUS : UNLOCKED (FREE RUN)
REFERENCE : NO SIGNAL

◆ Operation
Button Function
↑ and ↓ Moves the cursor up and down.
← and → Changes the value of the selected parameter.
1 to 10 (0) Allows you to enter the value for the selected parameter.
ENTER Confirms the value that is entered by the number buttons.
MENU Return to INTERFACE.

121
◆ Parameters
Parameter Setting range Description
(Default is highlighted)
GENLOCK REFERENCE LOCK Select a sync mode.
SELECT (MV-3240 initial value) REFERENCE LOCK: Genlock mode using an
PTP LOCK external reference signal. (MV-1640IF option is
(MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP required.)
initial value) PTP LOCK: Input lock mode using a PTP signal.
DELAY ON, OFF Reduces I/O delay to one field (approx. 16.6 ms) if in
REDUCT (*1) external sync mode.
H PHASE (*2) -255 to 255 Adjusts the horizontal phase against an external
(Default: 0) reference signal.
V PHASE (*2) -15 to 15 Adjusts the vertical phase against an external
(Default: 0) reference signal.
CASCADE OFF Select where the main unit will be connected when
1st making a cascade connection. (*4) (For MV-1640IP,
Nth available only when MV-1640SDI is installed.)
LAST OFF: No cascade connection
1st: First unit in a cascade connection
Nth: Second and third unit.
LAST: Fourth unit
LOCK LOCKED Displays the genlock status.
STATUS UNLOCKED LOCKED: Video signals are genlocked.
HOLD OVER (*3) UNLOCKED: Video signals are NOT Genlocked.
HOLD OVER: Video signals are hold over when PTP
LOCK is selected.
REFERENCE If REFERENCE LOCK NOSIGNAL Displays the reference signal
is selected. UNSUPPORTED format.
B.B.(NTSC) If no signal is present, "NO
B.B.(PAL) SIGNAL" is displayed.
TRI(1080/59.94i) If the input signal is invalid,
TRI(1080/50i) "UNSUPPORTED" is
TRI(720/59.94p) displayed
TRI(720/50p)
If INPUT LOCK is NOSIGNAL
selected. UNSUPPORTED
(Nth or LAST in 1080/59.94p(B)
CASCADE connection) 1080/50p(B)
1080/59.94p(A)
1080/50p(A)
1080/59.94i
1080/50i
720/59.94p
720/50p
525/60
625/50
If PTP LOCK is None
selected. (*3) PTP Detect
(*1)
If all input sources (IP/SDI) are not synchronized to the external reference signal input to REF IN,
turning DELAY REDUCT ON causes screen tearing. Use DELAY REDUCT only when all input signals
are genlocked.
(*2) If directly entering number values, use the following expressions to calculate values.
Actual H PHASE value = -255 + (input value) (Ex. To set the H PHASE to 10, enter 265.)
Actual V PHASE value = -15 + (input value) (Ex. To set the V PHASE to 5, enter 20.)
(*3) Effective for MF-1640IP/MV-3240IP only.
(*4) For MV-3240IP, only 1st or OFF can be set.

IMPORTANT
When changing settings, wait at least 5 seconds before you exit the menu screen to properly
apply them to the main unit.

122
7-10. VERSION & OPTION
In the Main menu, move the cursor to [9 VERSION & OPTION >], and press the ENTER button.
The following menu appears.
MV-1640IP MV-3240

VERSION & OPTION VERSION & OPTION

MAIN(SNo:xxxxxxxx) IP MAIN(SNo:xxxxxxxx)
SOFT [Link] SOFT [Link] SOFT [Link]
FPGA1 [Link] BASE [Link] FPGA1 [Link]
FPGA2 [Link] UNIT [Link] FPGA2 [Link]
CPLD [Link] CPLD [Link]
SDI (Upper)
SDI CPLD [Link] FPGA [Link]
CPLD [Link] FPGA [Link] SDI (Lower)
CPLD [Link] FPGA [Link]
MV-1640IF INSTALLED
MV-1640PS INSTALLED MV-1640IF INSTALLED
MV-1640PS INSTALLED

MV-3240IP
VERSION & OPTION

MAIN(SNo:xxxxxxxx) IP
SOFT [Link] SOFT [Link]
FPGA1 [Link] BASE [Link]
FPGA2 [Link] UNIT [Link]
CPLD [Link] UNIT2 [Link]

MV-1640IF INSTALLED
MV-1640PS INSTALLED

◆ Operation
Button Function
MENU Returns to MAIN MENU.

◆ Parameters
Parameter Description
MAIN Displays the main card version and serial number.
IP Displays IP card versions. (MV-1640IP only)
SDI(Upper) * Displays SDI(Upper) card versions.
(If MV-1640SDI option is installed for MV-1640IP.)
SDI(Lower) * Displays SDI(Lower) card versions. (MV-3420)
MV-1640IF Shows whether the MV-1640IF option is installed.
MV-1640PS Shows whether the optional power supply unit is installed.
* If an MV-1640-12G option is installed, ”+12G/6G” is displayed.

123
7-11. VIEWER
In the Main menu, move the cursor to [10 VIEWER >], and press the ENTER button. The following
menu appears.

VIEWER

VIEWER PORT1: ON
VIEWER PORT2: ON

◆ Operation
Button Function
↑ and ↓ Moves the cursor up and down.
← and → Changes the value of the selected parameter.
MENU Returns to MAIN MENU.

◆ Parameters
Parameter Setting range Description
(Default is highlighted)
VIEWER PORT1-2 ON Turn ON or OFF the movie file transfer.
OFF Restart the Main Unit after changing the
setting.

IMPORTANT
When an optional output card is installed, if both VIEWER PORT 1 and 2 are turned on, the
frame rate becomes slower than when only one port is on.

Ex.) Turn off the VIEWER PORT2.

(1) Select the VIEWER PORT2 using ↑ or ↓button.
(2) Select OFF using ← or → button.
(3) Press the MENU button twice to move to the SAVE CHANGE? screen.
(4) Select SAVE using ↑ or ↓ button, then press the ENTER button.
(5) Restart the MV-1640IP/MV-3240. The setting will be reflected after restart.

124
8. Information Display
Selecting Information for Video/Information windows allows you to display various items of information
on the windows. (See Sec. 6-3-4. “Information” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.)
The following information can be displayed using the Information display feature.

Display mode Refer to Description

Displays a TEXT window that can display up to 32 characters x 16
Text 8-1
lines.
Log 8-2 Displays a LOG window stored in the Main Unit (up to 4096 logs).
Unit information 8-3 Displays a UNIT window (power unit, fan, LTC and sync info).
Output information 8-4 Displays an Output window (output format info).
Audio information 8-5 Displays an AUDIO window (OUT1-4 audio info).
LAN information 8-6 Displays a LAN window (LAN1 and LAN2 info).
Displays a VERSION window (MAIN card, IP card and installed
Version information 8-7
option versions).

TEXT WINDOW An information display TEXT window allows

text contents and border luminance to be
set.
See the Layout Manager User Manual, Sec.
5-11-4. "Information" for details on setting
procedures.

Example display

8-1. Information Display - Text

Text windows can be displayed by setting the Display type to Text in the Information Display menu.
Text content can be edited via Layout Manager, Serial or LAN command.

TEXT WINDOW
TEXT WINDOW
・ ・
・ ・
16 lines ・ 8 lines
・
・ ・

MV-1640IP INFORMATION DISP TEXT MV-1640IP INFORM

32 char.
16 char.
Normal size text Double size text

IMPORTANT
In a text window, up to 32 char. x 16 lines standard size text can be displayed. With double size
texts, up to 16 char. x 8 lines can be displayed.

125
8-2. Information Display - Log
Log windows can be displayed by setting Display type to Log in the Information Display menu.

LOG

1) --- 2013/01/02 ---

A [Link]-S01 VD LOSS Detect
--- 2013/01/01 ---
2) S [Link]-S01 1080/59.94i 4)
! [Link]-POWER1 Normal

3)

0001 – 0003 / 0003

5) 6) 7)
Item Description
1 Displays the date and time of log data.
Displays the urgency level of log data.
!: Warning
2 Indication
A: Alarm
S: Status
3 Location Displays information such as slot and window.
4 Description Displays log details.
5 Displays the start point of log data.
6 Displays the end point of the log data.
7 Displays the total number of log entries.

Refer to Appendix 3 for more log details.

“Not Installed” is displayed if the specified component is not configured.

126
8-3. Information Display - Unit Information
The UNIT window can be displayed by setting Display type to Unit in the Information Display menu.

UNIT
-POWER-
1: Normal
2: Abnormal
-FAN-
1: Normal 2: Normal
3: Normal 4: Normal
5: Normal 6: Normal
-LTC DISPLAY(IF)-
1: No Signal 2: No Signal
3: No Signal 4: No Signal
-GENLOCK: REFERENCE LOCK-
Status : Unlocked
Format: No Signal

Display item Description

Displays status of power units 1-2.
Normal: ON
POWER 1-2
Abnormal: A failure has occurred.
Not Installed: Uninstalled power unit
Displays status of FAN 1-6.
FAN 1-6 Normal: Operating normally
Abnormal: A failure has occurred.
Displays CLOCK 1-4 LTC display status
LTC 1-4 LTC Display: Normally input and displayed
No Signal: No input
RTC Display: Normally input, but displaying RTC
Displays the GENLOCK status
Status Lock: Video signals are genlocked.
Unlocked (Free Run): Video signals are NOT genlocked.
Displays the format of reference signal or input video for
GENLOCK: reference source.
<REFERENCE LOCK mode>
REFERENCE No Signal, NTSC, PAL, 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 720/59.94p,
LOCK 720/50p, Unsupported
or
INPUT LOCK Format <INPUT LOCK mode> MV-3240IP does not support this function.
or No Signal, Unsupported, 1080/59.94p(B), 1080/50p(B),
PTP LOCK 1080/59.94p(A), 1080/50p(A), 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i,
720/59.94p, 720/50p, 525/60, 625/50

<PTP LOCK mode> *MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP only

None, PTP Detect

127
8-4. Information Display - Output Information
The OUTPUT window can be displayed by setting Display type to Output in the Information Display
menu.
MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP MV-3240
OUTPUT OUTPUT

SDI OUT1: 1080/59.94i SDI OUT1: 1080/59.94i

SDI OUT2: 1080/59.94i SDI OUT2: 1080/59.94i
SDI OUT3: 1080/59.94i SDI OUT3: 1080/59.94i
SDI OUT4: 1080/59.94i SDI OUT4: 1080/59.94i
HDMI OUT: 1080/59.94p HDMI OUT: 1080/59.94p
(Connected) (Connected)

IP OUT1 : 1080/59.94i
IP OUT2 : 1080/59.94i
IP OUT3 : 1080/59.94i
IP OUT4 : 1080/59.94i

8-5. Information Display - Audio Information

The AUDIO (ASSIGN&GAIN) menu can be displayed by setting Display type to Audio in the
Information Display menu.
Displays OUT1-4 status. OUT1 is a common setting for SDI OUT1/ HDMI OUT.

AUDIO
AUDIO MONITOR MODE: Adaptive
OUT1: Src01 / PACKET OFF
OUT2: Src01 / 0.0dB
OUT3: Src01 / 0.0dB
OUT4: Src01 / 0.0dB

8-6. Information Display - LAN Information

The LAN window can be displayed by setting Display type to LAN in the Information Display menu.
Displays information for LAN1 and LAN2.

MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP MV-3240

LAN LAN
-LAN1-
IP ADDRESS : 192.168. 0. 10 IP ADDRESS : 192.168. 0. 10
([Link]) SUBNET : 24bit
SUBNET : 24bit GATEWAY : 0. 0. 0. 0
GATEWAY : 0. 0. 0. 0 MAC ADDRESS : 00-10-B1-14-30-01
MAC ADDRESS : 00-10-B1-12-B0-01
(00-10-B1-12-D0-01)
-LAN2-
IP ADDRESS : 192.168. 0. 12
SUBNET : 24bit
GATEWAY : 0. 0. 0. 0
MAC ADDRESS : 00-10-B1-12-C0-01

128
8-7. Information Display - Version Information
The Version window can be displayed by setting Display type to Version in the Information Display
menu.

MV-1640IP MV-3240
VERSION VERSION
MAIN MAIN
DSP : 01.00 CPLD : 01.00 DSP : 01.00 CPLD : 01.00
FPGA1: 01.00 FPGA2: 01.00 FPGA1: 01.00 FPGA2: 01.00
IP SDI (Upper)
SOFT : 01.00.00 CPLD : 01.00 FPGA : 01.00
BASE : 00.A0.00 SDI (Lower)
UNIT : 17.99.77 CPLD : 01.00 FPGA : 01.00
MV-1640SDI
CPLD : 01.00 FPGA : 01.00 MV-1640IF Installed
MV-1640PS Not Installed
MV-1640IF Installed
MV-1640PS Not Installed

MV-3240IP
VERSION
MAIN
DSP : 01.00 CPLD : 01.00
FPGA1: 01.00 FPGA2: 01.00
IP
SOFT : 01.00.00
BASE : 00.A0.00
UNIT : 17.99.77
UNIT2: 17.99.77

MV-1640IF Installed
MV-1640PS Not Installed

Setting Description
DSP Displays the DSP version.
FPGA1 Displays the MAIN FPGA1 version.
MAIN
FPGA2 Displays the MAIN FPGA2 version.
CPLD Displays the MAIN CPLD version.
SOFT Displays the IP card SOFT version. * MV-1640IP/3240IP
BASE Displays the IP card BASE version. * MV-1640IP/3240IP
IP
UNIT Displays the IP card UNIT version. * MV-1640IP/3240IP
UNIT2 Displays the IP card UNIT version. * MV-3240IP
MV-1640IP: Displays whether an MV-1640SDI option is “Installed” or “Not Installed”
MV-1640SDI for MV-1640IP. If installed, displays FPGA and CPLD versions.
MV-3240: Displays the FPGA and CPLD versions of each SDI card for MV-3240."
SDI(Upper/Lower) (*1)
MV-640IF Displays whether an MV-1640IF option is “Installed” or “Not Installed.”
MV-1640PS Displays whether an MV-1640PS option is “Installed” or “Not Installed.”

(*1) If an MV-1640-12G option is installed, ”+12G/6G” is displayed.

129
9. LAN Interface
9-1. LAN Interface Communication Standard
<Communication Specification>
Setting Description
Ethernet Interface Connector RJ-45
Baud rate 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T
Ethernet Protocol TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SNTP, SNMP, NMOS, EMBER+ *
Network cables 100BASE-TX: Category 5 or better
1000BASE-T: Category 6 or Enhanced category 5
* NMOS and Ember+ are effective only for MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP.

<Use at 100BASE-TX>
Use straight LAN cables to connect units using a hub.
Use a crossover LAN cable for a direct connection.
If the LAN port to be used supports Auto-MDIX (automatic cable detection) either cable can be
used.

<Use at 1000BASE-T>
Either a straight or crossover LAN cable can be used.
IMPORTANT
Category 6 crossover LAN cables cannot be used.

<Network settings>
Setting Default Setting range
[Link]
IP address(LAN1) 1 - 223. 0 - 255. 0 - 255. 0 - 252
([Link])
IP address(LAN2)
*MV-1640IP [Link] 1 - 223. 0 - 255. 0 - 255. 0 - 255
/MV-3240IP
Subnet mask 24
0 to 30
length ([Link])
0 - 223. 0 - 255. 0 - 255. 0 - 255
Gateway [Link]
([Link] indicates the gateway is not set.)
For user commands sending and receiving (Main):
51000+α
For user commands sending and receiving
(Redundant): 51000+α+1
α: 10 For Live Viewer port 1: 52000+α
For Live Viewer port 2: 53000+α
For maintenance (Main): 54000+α
For communication with Layout Manager: 65000+α
Port number TSL5.0: Other (Default port: 8901(changeable))
21 FTP (Unchangeable)
80 HTTP (Unchangeable)
123 SNTP (Unchangeable)
161, 162 SNMPv2c (Unchangeable)
9000 Ember+(Unchangeable)
50000-50003 For AUX box transmission (Unchangeable)
MAC address Factory set (Unchangeable)

130
α: Indicates the 4th octet number value of the IP address. Port numbers are defined as the
sum of the base value and α.
(Ex: If IP address is set to [Link], the user command port is defined as 51010.)

IMPORTANT
 The LAN2 IP address is effective only for MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP. The LAN2 cannot use the
next IP address of LAN1. For example, if LAN1 is [Link], [Link] cannot be
used.
 Consult your network administrator when setting network settings.
 The connection may be unrecoverable for a few minutes if a communication is terminated
without a proper shutdown, such as due to the cable being disconnected. In such case, wait
awhile then reconnect, or reboot the Main Unit and reconnect.
 Host address bits in the subnet mask for the IP address should not all be set to 0 or 1. Also,
the first octet of the IP address should not be set to 127.

131
10. Troubleshooting
If any of the following problems occur while operating the Main Unit, before assuming a unit malfunction
has occurred, follow the troubleshooting procedures below to see if the problem can be corrected.

Problem Check Action

Remove any objects blocking the fan vent. If
Check that no objects are
there are no objects in the way, the fan may
blocking the fan vent at the
need to be replaced. Contact your dealer for
The FAN ALARM side of the unit.
assistance.
indicator on the front
panel is lit or flashing. Remove any objects blocking the vent
Check that no objects are
grate. If there are no objects in the way, the
blocking the vent grate at
fan may need to be replaced. Contact your
the front of the unit.
dealer for assistance.
No information is
Are all information display Check the display settings in Layout
displayed on the
settings set to ON? Manager.
screen.

If not, change the output format (resolution

and sampling frequency) of the Main Unit
Is the monitor being used using Layout Manager.
compatible with the format
The image is
(resolution and sampling If you are unsure of the format of the
improperly displayed.
frequency) set on the Main monitor, hold down the button for it to flash,
Unit? then the format can be verified using test
signals that are output from HDMI/SDI OUT.
See Sec. 5-3-8. “Outputting SDI / HDMI /
AUDIO Test Signals” for details.
Is the output frequency Check that the monitor is compatible with
Video noise appears. (vertical frequency) set to 50Hz. If not, change the output setting or
50Hz? the monitor to a 50Hz-compatible monitor.
To display full-screen images in 2K Layout
mode, assign a 2K Video Window to the
Is a Video 2K Window Screen layouts.
Full screen display
assigned to the output
error. See Sec 5-4. “Layout Mode / Output
screen?
Format” in the Layout Manager User
Manual.
When temperature in the unit becomes
abnormally high, mode is forcibly switched
to “SAFE MODE.”
Is any object blocking the If a fan is operating normally, turn the power
“SAFE MODE” is fan vent? off and check if any object is blocking the
displayed.
Is a fan stopped? fan vent.
If no countermeasure is taken after display
of “SAFE MODE”, the power supply is
automatically shut down.

132
Appendix 1. Tally Indication List
1-1. To use GPI-IO (MV-1640IF Option)
For receiving tally signals. The table below describes how tally indications correspond to tally inputs.
See "Appendix 5. GPI-IO Control (MV-1640IF)" for tally interface details.

Frame Display(Overlap: Disabled)

Tally Input No Input Red Green Amber Red/Green Simultaneous Input
Simultaneous
- - - - - Red Amber Split
Tally Input Setting
Tally Information Left = Right =
- - - - - - -
Setting Green Red
Frame Display for Border
Off
No Tally Input Color
Display

Frame Display(Overlap: Enabled)

Amber Red/Green Simultaneous
Tally Input No Input Red Green
Input
Tally Information
- - - - Left/Green Right/Red
Setting
Border Border
Frame Display Off Off - -
Color Color
Display

Indicator Display
No Red/Green/Amber
Tally Input Red Green Amber
Input Simultaneous Input
Tally Information
Left/Green
Setting
Display
No Red/Green/Amber
Tally Input Red Green Amber
Input Simultaneous Input
Tally Information
Right/Red
Setting

Display

Frame/ Split Display

Red/Green/Amber
Tally Input No Input Red Green Amber
Simultaneous Input
Tally Information
Left/Green
Setting
Frame Display for Border
Off - - - -
No Tally Input Color
Display
Red/Green/Amber
Tally Input No Input Red Green Amber
Simultaneous Input
Tally Information
Right/Red
Setting
Frame Display for Border
Off - - - -
No Tally Input Color
Display

133
Frame + Indicator Display (Overlap: Disabled)
Red/Green/Amber
Tally Input No Input Red Green Amber
Simultaneous Input
Tally Information
Left = Green
Setting
Frame Display for Border Border Border
Off Off Off - -
No Tally Input Color Color Color
Display
Tally Information
Right = Red
Setting
Frame Display for Border Border Border
Off Off Off - -
No Tally Input Color Color Color
Display

Frame + Indicator Display (Overlap: Enabled)

Red/Green/Amber
Tally Input No Input Red Green Amber Simultaneous
Input
Tally Information Left = Green
Setting
Frame Display for Border Border
Off - - Off -
No Tally Input Color Color
Display
Tally Information Right = Red
Setting
Frame Display for Border Border
Off - - Off -
No Tally Input Color Color
Display

Frame/ Sprit + Indicator Display

Tally Input None Red Green Amber Red/Green *
Tally Information
Left = Green
Setting
Frame Display for Border
Off - - - -
No Tally Input Color
Display
Tally Information
Right = Red
Setting
Frame Display for Border
Off - - - -
No Tally Input Color
Tally Information
Setting

* Regarding Frame Display, Amber priority is given when Amber is input

134
1-2. To Use Command
Tally indication is controlled by the serial command that is described in Sec. 3-14. “Tally Source
Control (STO)” in the Command User Manual.

*1

<Frame Display>
Select which tally information to indicate at (*1) in the figure above.

<Indicator Display>
Displays tally as commanded.

Frame Display (Overlap: Disabled)

Frame Command: Disabled
Left Tally Right Tally
Tally Information Setting Left = Green Right = Red
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color Off Border Color
Off Off

Frame Display for No Tally Input - Off Border Color

Red/Green/Amber Off
Left Tally
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color -
Off Red/Green/Amber

Right Tally
Frame Display for No Tally Input - -
Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber

Left Tally Right Tally

Frame Command: Enabled

Center/Frame Tally None Red Green Amber
Frame Display for No
Off Border Color - - -
Tally Input
Display

135
Frame Display (Overlap: Enabled)
* Tally Information settings and Frame Command settings enabled in Overlap Disabled are
disabled.
Left Tally Right Tally
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color
Off Off
Frame Display for No Tally Input -
Red/Green/Amber Off
Frame Display for No Tally Input -
Off Red / Green/Amber
Frame Display for No Tally Input -
Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber

Indicator Display
Tally Input Display

Off

Left Tally: Red/Green/Amber

Right Tally: Off
Center Tally: Off
Left Tally: Off
Right Tally: Red/Green/Amber
Center Tally: Off
Left Tally: Off
Right Tally: Off
Center Tally: Red/Green/Amber
Left Tally: Red/Green/Amber
Right Tally: Red/Green/Amber
Center Tally: Red/Green/Amber

Frame/Split Display
Tally Input None Left Tally only Right Tally only
Frame Display for
Off Border Color - -
No Tally Input

Display
Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber
Other than None for
Tally Input Center Tally only
both left and right
Frame Display for
Off Border Color -
No Tally Input

Display
Ex.) Left: Red / Right: Green

136
Frame + Indicator Display (Overlap: Disabled)
Frame Command: Disabled
Left Tally Right Tally
Tally Information Setting Left = Green Right = Red
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color Off Border Color
Off Off
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color

Red/Green/Amber Off
Left Tally
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color -

Off Red/Green/Amber
Right Tally
Frame Display for No Tally Input - -

Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber
Left Tally Right Tally

Frame Command: Enabled

Center/ Frame Tally None Red Green Amber
Frame Display for No Off Border Color - - -
Tally Input
Display

Frame + Indicator Display (Overlap: Enabled)

* Tally Information settings and Frame Command settings enabled in Overlap Disabled are
disabled.
Left Tally Right Tally
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color
Off Off
Frame Display for No Tally Input
Red/Green/Amber Off
Frame Display for No Tally Input -
Off Red/Green/Amber
Frame Display for No Tally Input -
Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber

Frame/ Split + Indicator Display

Tally Input None Right Tally only Left Tally only
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color - -

Display
Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber
All Tallies other
Tally Input Center Tally
than None
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color -

Display

137
1-5. To use TSL 5.0
1) Connect a device, such as a production switcher, for TSL communication use to the LAN
interface referring to Sec. 9. “LAN Interface”.

2) To display titles that are received using TSL 5.0 protocol, select TSL 5.0 for Source Text Type
in the System Settings screen in Layout Manager.
* See Sec. 5-12-1. “System” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

3) To display tallies that are received using TSL 5.0 protocol, set Tally > Input to TSL 5.0 in
Layout Manager.
4) Select how to input tallies
3) Select TSL5.0

2) Select TSL 5.0

4) Select how to input tallies between System (All Sources) (collective setting) and Individual
Source (separate setting). See Sec. 5-12-1. “System” in the Layout Manager User Manual for
details.

5) Set the UDP port number, screen number, and whether to insert DLE characters in packets
for the TSL 5.0 protocol communication.
* See Sec. 5-12-1. “System” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

6) Set the index (display address) for each source channel.

* See Sec. 5-3-5. “Tally/Title Block Settings” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.

7) Click OK for the settings to take effect.

5) Set the display address

6) Click OK

138
Frame Display (Overlap: Disabled)
Display Mode: Default & Frame Command: Disabled
Tally Input Tally Information Setting
Left Tally Right Tally Left = Green Right = Red
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color Off Border Color

Off Off

Red/Green/Amber Off
Red/Green/Amber

Off Red/Green/Amber
Red/Green/Amber

Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber
Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber

Frame Display (Overlap: Disabled)

Display Mode: Default & Frame Command: Enabled
Text Tally Off Red/Green/Amber
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color - -

Display
Red/Green/Amber

Frame Display (Overlap: Enabled)

Display Mode: Default
Frame Display for No Tally Input
Left Tally Right Tally Off Border Color
Off Off

Red/Green/Amber Off
Red/Green/Amber

Off Red/Green/Amber
Red/Green/Amber

Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber
Ex.) Left: Red & Right: Green

Frame Display (Overlap: Disabled)

Display Mode: Mode1/2
Display Mode Mode 1 Mode 2
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color Off Border Color
Left Tally Right Tally
Off/Amber Off/Amber

Red Off/Amber

Green Off/Amber

Off/Amber Red

Red Red

Green Red

Simultaneous Tallly Input

Off/Amber Green

Red Green
Simultaneous Tallly Input
Green Green

139
Frame Display (Overlap: Enabled)
Display Mode: Mode1/2
Display Mode Mode 1 Mode 2
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color Off Border Color
Left Tally Right Tally
Off/Amber Off/Amber

Red Off/Amber
Left Tally: Red

Green Off/Amber
Left Tally: Green

Off/Amber Red
Right Tally: Red

Red Red
Left Tally: Red Right Tally: Red

Green Red
Left Tally: Green /
Right Tally: Red

Off/Amber Green
Right Tally: Green

Red Green Left Tally: Red /

Right Tally: Green

Green Green
Right Tally: Green Left Tally: Green
* Mode 1: Red left/green right tallies only displayed
Mode 2: Green left/red right tallies only displayed

Frame/Split
Display Mode: Default
Left Tally Right Tally
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color
OFF OFF

Red/Green/Amber OFF
Red/Green/Amber

OFF Red/Green/Amber
Red/Green/Amber

Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber
Ex.) Left Tally: Green / Right Tally: Red

140
Frame/Split
Display Mode: Mode 1/2
Left Tally Right Tally
Display Mode Mode1 Mode2
Frame Display for No Tally Input Off Border Color Off Border Color
Off/Amber Off/Amber

Off/Amber Red
Right Tally: Red

Off/Amber Green
Right Tally: Green

Red Off/Amber
Left Tally: Red

Red Red
Left Tally: Red Right Tally: Red

Red Green Left Tally: Red

Right Tally Green

Green Off/Amber
Left Tally: Green

Green Red Left Tally: Green

Right Tally: Red

Green Green
Right Tally: Green Left Tally: Green
* Mode 1: Red left/green right tallies only displayed
Mode 2: Green left/red right tallies only displayed

Indicator Display (Default)

Left Tally Right Tally Center Tally Display

Off Off Off

Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber Red/Green/Amber

141
Indicator Display
Display Mode: Mode 1/2
Left Tally Right Tally Center Tally
Display mode Mode1 Mode2
Off/Amber Off/Amber Off

Off/Amber Red Red/Green/Amber

Center Center/Right

Off/Amber Green OFF

Right

Red Off/Amber Red/Green/Amber

Left/Center Center

Red Red OFF

Left Right

Red Green Red/Green/Amber

Left/Center Center

Green Off/Amber OFF

Left

Green Red Red/Green/Amber

Center Left/Center/Right

Green Green OFF

Right Left
* Mode 1: Red left/green right tallies only displayed
Mode 2: Green left/red right tallies only displayed

142
Appendix 2. Logo Control via GPI (MV-1640IF option)
The MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP can display logos for On-air tally signaling and other purposes.
The logo display can be controlled either by GPIO level signal input or commands via a serial interface
or LAN.

(1) Right-click on a logo window displayed in the Edit Mode screen in Layout Manager. Select ON
under Logo > External Control.
(2) From the Controller screen, go to System > System > Logo. The screen as below opens. Select
GPIO (IF) or Command under External Control.
For control via commands, the necessary setting is complete. For further details, see Sec. 3-16.
“Logo Control (SLC)” in the Command User Manual.

2) Select GPIO (IF),

or Command

3) Select a logo and

contact type (make or
break) for each logo
window.

(3) Select a logo to be assigned to the make and/or break contact for logo windows respectively.
(4) Then open the [System > MV-1640IF(Option) > GPI-IO] menu in the Controller screen. Select a
desired pin and set its Type (IN) to Logo Make/Break. Now the pin setup is completed. Use level
triggers to control the logo display.

4) Assign logo
windows to pins

143
Example)
1) Assign a lit ON AIR sign image to Logo1. (Maximum size: 1024 x 512)

2) Assign an unlit ON AIR sign image to Logo2. (Maximum size: 1024 x 512)

3) Assign Logo 1 to MAKE contact, and Logo 2 to BREAK contact. The ON AIR sign will appear
as shown below.

MAKE contact (ON AIR) BREAK contact

144
Appendix 3. Log Information
The information in the following table will be displayed in the log.
Indication Type Location Description
Power unit status
Power supply unit Power 1/2 Normal : ON
Abnormal: OFF / NotInstalled
Warning
Fan alarm status
Fan Alarm Fan 1-6 Normal: No error
Abnormal: An error has occurred.
Genlock status
Locked : Locked state
Genlock Status Unlocked: Unlocked state
HoldOver: Hold over state (PTP Locked)
* Available in MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP only.
Genlock format
NoSignal,
NTSC, PAL,
Genlock Format
1080/59.94i, 1080/50i,
720/59.94p, 720/50p,
Unsupported
Signal format for Input Lock
NoSignal, Unsupported, 1080/59.94p-LevelB, 1080/50p-
Input Lock Format LevelB , 1080/59.94p-LevelA, 1080/50p-LevelA,
1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 720/59.94p, 720/50p,
525/60, 625/50
PTP Lock signal status (MV-1640IP only)
Ptp Lock Format
None, PTP Detect
Reference type
Reference Lock: Genlock with reference
Genlock Type GEN TYPE Input Lock: Genlock with input video
Status Ptp Lock: Genlock with PTP lock.
* Available in MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP only.
Clock1-4 LTC display status
Normal : Properly displayed
LTC display Clock 1-4 No Input : No LTC input
Normal / RTC :
Properly displayed using RTC (not LTC)
HDMI Out format
1080/59.94p, 1080/50p, 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i,
HDMI out format HDMI OUT
720/59.94p, 720/50p, 720x480/59.94p, 720x576/50p,
2160/59.94p, 2160/50p
HDMI Out Hot Plug Detect
HDMI HPD HDMI Out Unconnected: Unconnected to a monitor.
Connected: Connected to a monitor.
SDI Out 1-4 format
1080/59.94p, 1080/50p, 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i,
SDI out1-4 format SDI OUT1-4
1080/59.94p_2SI, 1080/50p_2SI, 720/59.94p, 720/50p,
2160/59.94p, 2160/50p
IP Out 1-4 format
No Stream, Detail, 1080/59.94p, 1080/50p, 1080/59.94i,
IP out1-4 format IP OUT1-4
1080/50i, 1080/59.94p_2SI, 1080/50p_2SI, 720/59.94p,
720/50p

145
Indication Type Location Description
Input format
NoSignal, Unknown, 1080/60pA, 1080/59.94pA,
1080/50pA, 1080/60pB, 1080/59.94pB, 1080/50pB,
1080/60i or 1080/30PsF, 1080/59.94i or 1080/29.97PsF,
1080/50i or 1080/25PsF, 1080/24PsF, 1080/23.98PsF,
1080/30p, 1080/29.97p, 1080/25p, 1080/24p, 1080/23.98p,
Input video format Window01-40* 1035/60i, 1035/59.94i, 720/60p, 720/59.94p, 720/50p,
720/24p, 720/23.98p, 525/59.94i, 625/50i
2160/59.94p, 2160/50p, 2160/30p, 2160/29.97p, 2160/25p,
2160/24p, 2160/23.98p, 1080/60pA2SI, 1080/59.94pA2SI,
1080/50pA2SI, 1080/60pB2SI, 1080/59.94pB2SI,
1080/50pB2SI, 1080/30pC2SI, 1080/29.97pC2SI,
Status 1080/25pC2SI, 1080/24pC2SI, 1080/23.98pC2SI
AFD detection status
If AR: 4:3
Undefined, Reserved, 4:3-L 16:9T, 4:3-L 14:9T,
4:3-L>16:9, 4:3-F 4:3, 4:3-L 16:9 PRTD, 4:3-L 14:9,
AFD Window01-40* 4:3-F ALT 14:9, 4:3-L ALT 14:9, 4:3-L ALT 4:3
If AR: 16:9
Undefined, Reserved, 16:9-F 16:9, 16:9-P 14:9,
16:9-L>16:9, 16:9-P 4:3, 16:9-F PRTD,
16:9-P ALT 14:9, 16:9-F ALT 14:9, 16:9-F ALT 4:3
Closed Caption detection status
Closed Caption Window01-40* Undetected
Detected
Video loss detection status
- IP input * Available in MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP only.
Undetected
A: Detected (A)
Video loss
Window01-40* B: Detected (B)
detection
A/B: Detected (A/B)
- SDI input
Undetected
Detected
Video freeze detection status
Video freeze
Window01-40* Undetected
detection
Detected
Video luminance detection status
Video luminance
Window01-40* Undetected
detection
Detected
Video black detection status
Video black
Alarm Window01-40* Undetected
detection
Detected
SDI signal CRC error detection status
SDI signal CRC
Window01-40* Undetected
error detection
Detected
Audio loss detection status
- IP input
Undetected
A: Detected (A)
Audio loss
Window01-40* B: Detected (B)
detection
A/B: Detected (A/B)
- SDI input
Undetected
Detected
Audio over level detection status
Audio over level
Window01-40* Undetected
detection
Detected

146
 Indication Type Location Description
Audio silence detection status
Audio silence
Window01-40* Undetected
detection
Detected
Timecode loss detection status
* Available in MV-1640IP/ MV-3240IP only.
Undetected
Timecode loss
Window01-40* A: Detected (A)
detection
Alarm B: Detected (B)
A/B: Detected (A/B)
* SDI input and IP input (ST2022) are not supported.
Closed Caption loss detection status
Undetected
Closed Caption
Window01-40* Detected
loss detection
* IP input (ST2110) in MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP is not
supported.

For MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP, log information about the IP input/output is output.

Indication Type Location Description
SFP module detection status
Sfp module detect Port A - D (H) Detected
Undetected
Optical output error detection status
Sfp output status Port A - D (H) Normal
Error
Output optical level error detection status
Sfp output level Port A - D (H)
Same as above
Optical input detection status
Sfp input loss Port A - D (H)
Same as above
Optical input level error detection status.
Sfp input level Port A - D (H)
Same as above
SFP temperature alarm detection status
Sfp Temp Alarm Port A - D (H)
Same as above
SFP current alarm detection status
Sfp Current Alarm Port A - D (H)
Same as above
SFP voltage alarm detection status
Sfp Volt Alarm Port A - D (H)
Same as above
PHY link detection status
Alarm Mac/Phy Link Port A - D (H) Linked
Unlinked
MAC/PHY data input error detection status
Mac/Phy Data Input Port A - D (H) Normal
Error
Mac/Phy frame crc MAC/PHY frame CRC error detection status
Port A - D (H)
error Same as above
MAC/PHY IP checksum error detection status
Mac/Phy ip checksum Port A - D (H)
Same as above
Mac/Phy udp MAC/PHY UDP checksum error detection status
Port A - D (H)
checksum Same as above
MAC/PHY buffer over detection status
Mac/Phy buffer over Port A - D (H)
Same as above
Port A - B PTP packets receive detection status
Ptp packet recv
(Port E - F) Same as above
Port A - B PTP-Slave synchronization detection status
Ptp sync error
(Port E - F) Same as above
Hold Over detection status
Port A - B
Ptp hold over Normal
(Port E - F)
Hold Over

147
 Port A - B SFP port A/B (E/F)G M selection status
Ptp gm select
(Port E - F) GMID
Port A - B PTP receiving port selection status.
Ptp switch select
(Port E - F) sfpA / sfpB (sfpE / sfpF)
IP output (video) overflow detection status
Encap overflow(V)
IP Out1 - 4 Normal
Main/sub
Error
Encap overflow(A) IP output (audio) overflow detection status
IP Out1 - 4
Main/sub Same as above
IP input Decap error code detection status
Decap Main/sub IP In 1-16 (32)
Error code
SDI input signal (video) detection status for Encap
Sdi in send loss(V)
IP Out 1 - 4 Normal
Main/sub
Error
Sdi in send loss(A) SDI input signal (audio) detection status for Encap
IP Out 1 - 4
Main/sub Same as above
Sdi out recv loss(V) SDI output signal (video) detection status after Decap
IP In 1-16 (32)
Main/sub Same as above
Sdi out recv loss(A) SDI output signal (audio) detection status after Decap
IP In 1-16 (32)
Main/sub Same as above
Sdi out recv loss(M) SDI output signal (meta) detection status after Decap
IP In 1-16 (32)
Main/sub Same as above
SDI output signal (audio) error detection status after
Sdi out recv error(A)
IP In 1-16 (32) Decap
Main/sub
Same as above
* The indications in ( ) are only valid for the MV-3240IP.

Appendix 4. Preset Layouts (Internal and CD)

This appendix describes use and types of preset layout patterns included in the MV-1640IP/MV-3240
unit and provided CD-R.

<Layouts consist of>

Refer to the Layout Manager User Manual for details on layout editing.

Window area Layer number (higher numbered

windows are displayed over the windows
Audio level meter (L) Video or clock display area
of lower numbers.)
Window type
Audio level meter(R)

Window mode
- Single window
Window number - Quad window

Tally marker (R)

Tally marker (L) Title 1 Window status

(Video source number, information type, etc.）

148
4-1. 4K Preset Layouts (Internal and CD)
Layouts of this type are used in 4K Layout mode.
Refer to Sec. 5-4 “Layout Mode / Output Format Settings” in the Layout Manager User Manual to
check the output mode.

As factory default, Out1 displays the top-left corner of the screen layout because the Top Left
Screen is assigned to Out1. In the same manner, Out2 displays the top-right corner of the screen
layout because the TOP Right Screen is assigned to Out2.
To change the Screen assignment, refer to Sec. 5-6. “Screen Select” in the Layout Manager User
Manual.

CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_1_14-[Link]

P01,
P14 to P16

CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_2.mvl

P02

CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_3.mvl

P03

149
 CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_4.mvl

P04

CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_5.mvl

P05

CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_6.mvl

P06

CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_7.mvl

P07

150
 CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_8.mvl

P08

CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_9.mvl

P09

CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_10.mvl

P10

CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_11.mvl

P11

151
 CD
4K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_4K1080_12.mvl

P12

CD
4K_1080 > Layout6th Edit_4K1080_13.mvl

P13

152
4-2. 2K Preset Layouts (Internal and CD))
Layouts of this type are used in 2K Layout mode and output setting of 1080/720p.
Half of the windows are allocated to Screen1 and half to Screen2. No window is allocated to
Screen3 and Screen4. If the number of windows is insufficient, change the window allocation after
considering the layout to be applied. For confirmation of the settings, see Sec. 5-4 "Layout
Mode/Output Format Settings" in the Layout Manager User Manual. Screen1 is assigned to SDI
Out1/ HDMI Out and Screen2 is assigned to SDI Out2. To change the Screen assignment, refer
to Sec. 5-6. “Screen Select” in the Layout Manager User Manual.

CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_1_12-[Link]
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_1_12-[Link]
Screen1 Screen2

P01,
P12-P16

CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_2.mvl
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_2.mvl
Screen1 Screen2

P02

CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_3.mvl
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_3.mvl
Screen1 Screen2

P03

153
 CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_4.mvl
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_4.mvl
Screen1 Screen2

P04

CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_5.mvl
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_5.mvl
Screen1 Screen2

P05

CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_6.mvl
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_6.mvl
Screen1 Screen2

P06

CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_7.mvl
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_7.mvl
Screen1 Screen2

P07

154
 CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_8.mvl
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_8.mvl
Screen1 Screen2

P08

CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_9.mvl
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_9.mvl
Screen1 Screen2

P09

CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_10.mvl
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_10.mvl
Screen1 Screen2

P10

CD
- 2K_1080 > Layout6thEdit_2K1080_11.mvl
- 2K_720p > Layout6thEdit_2K720p_11.mvl
Screen1 Screen2

P11

155
Appendix 5. GPI-IO Control (MV-1640IF)
Installing the MV-1640IF/MV-3240IP option allows the MV-1640IP/MV-3240 to control screen outputs,
tally inputs, time correction, and alarm resets using up to 45 contact closure inputs to the GPI-IO
connector on the rear of the unit. Tally indication of three-color borders (red, green, and amber) on video
frames or three-color tally indicators are supported.
Twenty-three (23) pins of the connector can be used either for outputs or inputs. Up to 23 outputs can
be assigned to a fan alarm, power unit 1/2 status, video, audio and closed caption loss alarms, Genlock
status, and/or time correction.
Any one of the above 23 pins can be assigned to any of the functions above.
See Sec. 5-12-8. “MV-1640IF” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details.
◆ Assignable Inputs and Outputs
Input/Output Function Type of Pulse
Input Layout switching for multi-window mode Negative logic pulse
Source switching for full-screen mode
Red, Green, and Amber tally inputs (Source) Negative logic level
Red, Green, and Amber tally inputs (Window)
Time correction input Negative logic pulse
Alarm reset signal input
Count up/down timer start
Count up/down timer stop
Count up/down timer reset
Logo data switching Negative logic level
Live Viewer recording start Negative logic pulse
Window source change
Output Power unit 1 status Negative logic, open
Power unit 2 status collector

FAN alarm
GENLOCK status
Time correction output
Timer status
LTC status
Video loss alarm
Video freeze alarm
Video luminance level alarm
Video black level alarm
CRC error alarm
Over level audio alarm
Silence level audio alarm
Audio signal loss alarm
Timecode loss alarm
Closed caption loss alarm
Closed caption status
Selected output number status
Full/Multi/Edit screen display status
Temperature alarm
SNTP primary/secondary server status

156
 17 1

33 18
50 34

◆ Connector pin assignments

Factory default Factory default
Pin no. Function Pin no. Function
setting setting
1 Input 1 Red tally IN1 26 Input 26 or Output 4 Green tally IN10
2 Input 2 Red tally IN2 27 Input 27 or Output 5 Green tally IN11
3 Input 3 Red tally IN3 28 Input 28 or Output 6 Green tally IN12
4 Input 4 Red tally IN4 29 Input 29 or Output 7 Green tally IN13
5 Input 5 Red tally IN5 30 Input 30 or Output 8 Green tally IN14
6 Input 6 Red tally IN6 31 Input 31 or Output 9 Green tally IN15
7 Input 7 Red tally IN7 32 Input 32 or Output 10 Green tally IN16
8 Input 8 Red tally IN8 33 Input 33 or Output 11 Layout 1
9 Input 9 Red tally IN9 34 Input 34 or Output 12 Layout 2
10 Input 10 Red tally IN10 35 Input 35 or Output 13 Layout 3
11 Input 11 Red tally IN11 36 Input 36 or Output 14 Layout 4
12 Input 12 Red tally IN12 37 Input 37 or Output 15 Layout 5
13 Input 13 Red tally IN13 38 Input 38 or Output 16 Layout 6
14 Input 14 Red tally IN14 39 +5V ---
15 Input 15 Red tally IN15 40 Input 39 or Output 17 Layout 7
16 Input 16 Red tally IN16 41 Input 40 or Output 18 Layout 8
17 Input 17 Green tally IN1 42 Input 41 or Output 19 Layout 9
18 Input 18 Green tally IN2 43 Input 42 or Output 20 Layout 10
19 Input 19 Green tally IN3 44 Input 43 or Output 21 Layout 11
20 Input 20 Green tally IN4 45 Input 44 or Output 22 Layout 12
21 Input 21 Green tally IN5 46 Input 45 or Output 23 Layout 13
22 Input 22 Green tally IN6 47 PS1 alarm ---
23 Input 23 or Output 1 Green tally IN7 48 PS2 alarm ---
24 Input 24 or Output 2 Green tally IN8 49 FAN alarm ---
25 Input 25 or Output 3 Green tally IN9 50 GND ---
Compatible connector: DD-50P-NR(JAE)
Cover: DD-C1-J17-S6R(JAE)
Signal standard: As Remote input: Contact closure, TTL level negative logic pulse
As Tally Input: Contact closure, TTL negative logic level signal

IMPORTANT
The input signal pulse width should be 100 ms or more. The input signal that is received while a
screen layout is being changed is invalid. If you change the screen layout, wait for the on-screen
change to be completed before inputting signals.

157
 [Input Connector]
The figure on the right depicts the +5V
Main Unit circuit for each input pin. External control device Main Unit
430Ω

Photo
coupler

Input pin

GN
D

[Output Connector: TTL]

The figure on the right depicts the Main Unit
74LS06 or equivalent
circuit for each output pin (pins 23 through 38
and pins 40-46).
* Open collector negative logic output.
Maximum load current: 24VDC 40mA.

Main Unit External control device

[Output Port: Relay]

The figure below depicts the Main unit circuit for alarm output pin. Pins 47 through 50 are assigned
to PS1, PS2, FAN, and COM/GND respectively.
The circuit diagram for the main unit is as follows

External Main unit

control side side

+5V
Relay

PS1_ALARM

PS2_ALARM

FAN_ALAR
M

COM

PS1/2: CLOSE in case of abnormality or power off

FAN: CLOSE in case of abnormality

IMPORTANT
Each relay should be used at 100mA or less per output.

158
5-1. GPI Input
5-1-1. Full Screen Source Switching 1 to 32
Changes the selected output source to an input source (1 to 32) in full screen by negative
edge trigger. If ID is “0”, full screen auto sequence is performed.
In case of MV-1640IP, source 17-32 is valid only when MV-1640SDI option is installed.

5-1-2. Multi-window Layout Switching

Changes all or selected multi-window layouts to screens (preset layouts 1 to 16) by negative
edge trigger. If ID is “0,” the auto layout sequence is performed.

5-1-3. Red, Green, and Amber Tally Inputs (Source)

Displays red, green, and/or amber tallies (frames/indicators) on input channels by negative
edge trigger.
* To enable red, green, and amber tally inputs, the Tally Input setting must be set to GPIO
in Layout Manager. See Sec. 5-12-1. “System” in the Layout Manager User Manual for
details.

5-1-4. Red, Green, and Amber Tally Inputs (Window)

Displays red, green, and/or amber tallies (frames/indicators) on windows by negative edge
trigger.
* To enable red, green, and amber tally inputs, the Tally Input setting must be set to GPIO
in Layout Manager. See Sec. 5-12-1. “System” in the Layout Manager User Manual for
details.

5-1-5. ADJ_IN (Time Correction Input)

Corrects the internal clock by negative edge trigger.

1) When the second digit displays 1 to 29 -> Corrects to 0 second

2) When the second digit displays 30 to 59 -> Corrects to 0 second and adds 1 minute

5-1-6. Alarm Reset Input

Resets video alarms (video loss, freeze, luminance level, black level, CRC error), audio alarms
(over level, silence level, audio signal loss), time code loss and closed caption loss alarm by
negative edge trigger.

IMPORTANT
Alarms will not be reset if Alarm Reset Mode is set to NONE. See Sec. 5-12-5. “Alarm” in
the Layout Manager User Manual for details on Alarm Reset Mode settings.

159
5-1-7. Count Up / Down Timer Control
Controls the count up/down timer by negative edge trigger.

5-1-8. Logo Data Switching

Changes the logo images to be displayed by negative edge trigger. To enable the control,
select GPIO for logo control in Layout Manager. See Appendix 2. Logo Control via GPI (MV-
1640IF Option) for details.

5-1-9. Live Viewer Recording Start

Live Viewer recording starts by negative edge trigger. See Sec. 4-6-1. “Alarm Recording” in
the Live Viewer User Manual.

5-1-10. Window Source Change

Window input sources change by negative edge trigger. If ID is “0”,multi window auto
sequence is performed.
Available only when multi-window images are displayed.

IMPORTANT
Layout settings are not saved if a window input source is changed. On the contrary, if the
screen layout is changed, windows source changes are ignored and input sources stored
in the layout are used.

Mirror window does not support input source switching.

(See Sec. 6-3-3. “Mirror” in the Layout Manager User Manual for details of the mirror
window.

160
5-2. GPI Output
5-2-1. Power Unit 1 and 2 Status
There are two ways to check Power Unit 1/2 states:

(1) Power unit 1/2 alarm (Main unit ALARM OUT connector)
HiZ (OPEN): Normal state
LOW (COM: GND): An alarm has occurred, unit is powered off, or uninstalled power unit

(2) MV-1640IF GPIO output pin (23 to 38, 40 to 46)

HiZ: An alarm has occurred, unit is powered off, or uninstalled power unit
LOW: Normal state

5-2-2. FAN Alarm Output (Alarm Output for FAN Error)

There are two ways to check fan alarm states:

(1) FAN alarm (Main unit ALARM OUT connector)

HiZ (OPEN): Fans in the main unit are working normally or powered off.
LOW (COM: GND): Any one of the fans in the main unit have failed.
(2) MV-1640IF GPIO output pin (23 to 38, 40 to 46)
HiZ: Fans in the main unit are working normally or powered off.
LOW: Any one of the fans in the main unit have failed.

5-2-3. GENLOCK Status

Outputs a signal to inform the selected reference status.
See Sec. 5-4. "Reference (Genlock) Settings" in the Layout Manager User Manual for more
details.
The following three states are informed.
LOW Indicates that the reference signal is valid and video signals are
locked.
HiZ Indicates that no valid reference signal is detected.
LOW/HiZ Indicates that a valid reference signal input is present, however the
alternation system is not locked due to a frequency difference between that of
the output and reference signal. Or PTP Lock is selected during
Hold Over operation
* PTP Lock is available in MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP only.
Ex.) Reference signal is 59.94Hz and the output is 50Hz

5-2-4. External Time Correction Output

Outputs a pulse signal (500 ms) at the specified interval.

IMPORTANT
The external time correction output outputs a pulse signal at the specified time.
The external time correction output does not support the input of the external LTC.
The external time correction input does not supply buffered output.

161
5-2-5. Count Up / Down Timer Status
Outputs a signal that informs status of the count up/down timer.
HiZ: Not counting
LOW: Counting

5-2-6. LTC Status

Outputs a signal that informs the LTC input signal status to the rear panel LTC IN connector.
Status will be informed as one of the following:
LOW LTC input signal is present, and the subject clock LTC time code
display is enabled.
HiZ No LTC input signal
LOW/HiZ An LTC input signal is present, but the LTC time code display is
Alternation disabled for the subject clock.

5-2-7. Screen Status among Full, Multi or Editor

Outputs a signal that informs which mode is selected for the selected screen. (This status is
the same as the FULL/MULTI button status.)
LOW Indicates that Full-screen is selected.
HiZ Indicates that Multi-window is selected.
LOW/HiZ
Indicates that Editor screen is selected.
alternation

5-2-8. Preset / Source Status

Outputs a signal that informs whether the selected layout or source is displayed. (This status
is the same as that of button light indication (1-16 and AUTO) on the front panel.)
HiZ: Indicates that the selected preset/source is NOT displayed.
LOW: Indicates that the selected preset/source is displayed.

If ID is “00”, auto sequence status is indicated.

162
5-2-9. Alarm / Status Output
Issues each alarm signal if one or more alarm or status is detected in all input signals or an
alarm of the currently displayed layout screen is detected.

Alarm HiZ LOW

Video Loss No alarm Alarm is detected
Video Freeze
Luminance Level
Black Level
CRC Error
Audio Over Level
Audio Silence Level
Audio Signal Loss
Timecode Loss *
Closed Caption Data Loss
Closed Caption Status No status Status is detected
Power supply 1/2 alarm No alarm Alarm is detected
FAN alarm
Temperature alarm
SNTP primary/secondary server alarm
* Available in MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP only.

163
Appendix 6. SNMP Function
The SNMPv2C compatible remote SNMP monitoring system enables to monitor the MV-1640IP/MV-
3240. The MIB (Management Information Base) file for the SNMP monitoring system can be
downloaded by Download MIB file via MV-1640IP/MV-3240 Web browser. (See Sec. 2-7-1-3. “SNMP
Settings” in the Web Browser User Manual.) Also, See Sec. 5-12-9. “SNMP” in the Layout Manager
User Manual for details on SNMP network settings.
MV-3240 units allow you to turn on/off SNMP traps individually. For more details, see Sec. 5-12-9-2.
“Trap Report Setting” in the Layout Manager User Manual.

MV-1640IP
◆ GET List
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1.358.1 (mv1640IPGet)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv1640IPGetUnitInfo)
1 mv1640IPUnitName Unit name Ex.: "MV-1640IP" OCTET STRING
Interface Slot installation status
2 mv1640IPIfSlotType 1: notInstalled INTEGER
2: installed
SDI Slot installation status
3 Mv1640IPSdiSlotType 1: notInstalled INTEGER
2: installed
12G input option installation status
4 Mv1640IP12GOption 1: notInstalled INTEGER
2: installed
Unit MV-1640IP(MAIN) software version
information 11 mv1640IPSoftVer OCTET STRING
Ex.: "01.00"
12 mv1640IPFpga1Ver MV-1640IP(MAIN) FPGA1 version OCTET STRING
13 mv1640IPFpga2Ver MV-1640IP(MAIN) FPGA2 version OCTET STRING
14 mv1640IPCpldVer MV-1640IP(MAIN) CPLD version OCTET STRING
15 mv1640IPVoIPSoftVer MV-1640IP(VoIP) software version OCTET STRING
16 mv1640IPVoIPBaseVer MV-1640IP(VoIP) BASE version OCTET STRING
17 mv1640IPVoIPUnitVer MV-1640IP(VoIP)UNIT version OCTET STRING
18 mv1640IPSdiFpgaVer MV-1640IP(SDI)FPGA version OCTET STRING
19 mv1640IPSdiCpldVer MV-1640IP(SDI)CPLD version OCTET STRING
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv1640IPGetUnitStatus)
FAN ALARM status
1 mv1640IPFan1Status 1: normal INTEGER
2: abnormal
2 mv1640IPFan2Status Same as above INTEGER
3 mv1640IPFan3Status Same as above INTEGER
4 mv1640IPFan4Status Same as above INTEGER
5 mv1640IPFan5Status Same as above INTEGER
6 mv1640IPFan6Status Same as above INTEGER
Power unit 1 status
11 mv1640IPPowerUnit1Status 1: normal INTEGER
2: abnormal
Power unit 2 status
12 mv1640IPPowerUnit2Status 1: normal INTEGER
Unit status 2: abnormal
3: notInstalled * When MV-1640PS uninstalled
Reference / Input / PTP Lock sync status
21 mv1640IPGenlockStatus 1: locked INTEGER
2: unlocked
3: holdover
Reference input format
1: noSignal *When MV-1640IF uninstalled
2: ntsc
3: pal
22 mv1640IPGenlockFormat 4: format1080-59i INTEGER
5: format1080-50i
6: format720-59p
7: format720-50p
8: unsupported

164
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
Input Lock signal format
1: noSignal
2: unsupported
3: format525-60
4: format625-50
5: format1080-59i
23 mv1640IPInputLockFormat 6: format1080-50i INTEGER
7: format720-59p
8:format720-50p
9: format1080-59p-LevelA
10: format1080-50p-LevelA
11: format1080-59p-LevelB
12: format1080-50p-LevelB
PTPLock signal format
24 mv1640IPPTPLockFormat 1: none INTEGER
2: ptpDetect
Genlock type
25 mv1640IPGenlockType 1: referenceLock INTEGER
2: inputLock
3: ptplock
CLOCK1-4 LTC display status
1: normal - LTC normally input and displayed
31 mv1640IPLtc1Status 2: noSignal - No LTC input INTEGER
3: normal-RTC - LTC normally input but not
displayed (RTC displayed)
32 mv1640IPLtc2Status Same as above INTEGER
33 mv1640IPLtc3Status Same as above INTEGER
34 mv1640IPLtc4Status Same as above INTEGER
Unit status Unit temperature status
1: normal
2: warning-85
3: warning-90
41 mv1640IPTempStatus 4: warning-95 INTEGER
5: danger-100
6: danger-105
7: danger-110
8: danger-115
SNTP(Primary) communication status
1: disable
51 mv1640IPSntpPrimaryStatus 2: ok INTEGER
3: com-err
4: sync-err
5: over-err
SNTP(Secondary) communication status
52 mv1640IPSntpSecondaryStatus INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv1640IPGetOutputStatus)
HDMI Out format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
1 mv1640IPHdmiOutputFormat 602: format720-59p INTEGER
603: format720-50p
920: format720x480-59p
921: format720x576-50p
1001: format2160-59p
1002: format2160-50p
SDI Out1 format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
2 mv1640IPSdiOutput1Format 602: format720-59p INTEGER
Output video 603: format720-50p
status 1001: format2160-59p
1002: format2160-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
SDI Out2 format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
3 mv1640IPSdiOutput2Format 203: format1080-50i INTEGER
602: format720-59p
603: format720-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
4 mv1640IPSdiOutput3Format SDI Out3 format INTEGER
Same as above
5 mv1640IPSdiOutput4Format SDI Out4 format INTEGER
Same as above

165
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
IP Out1 format
1: noStream
2: detail
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
6 mv1640IPIpOutput1Format 202: format1080-59i INTEGER
203: format1080-50i
602: format720-59p
603: format720-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
7 mv1640IPIpOutput2Format IP Out2 format INTEGER
Same as above
8 mv1640IPIpOutput3Format IP Out3 format INTEGER
Same as above
9 mv1640IPIpOutput4Format IP Out4 format INTEGER
Same as above
HDMI Out Hot Plug detection
11 mv1640IPHdmiOutputHpd 1: unconnected INTEGER
2: connected
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv1640IPWindowTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].1 (mv1640IPWindowEntry)
1.x mv1640IPWindowChannel Window index1-25 INTEGER
1-25: Window 1-25
Window assign source no. 1-32
-1: none
1: notDisplayed
11.x mv1640IPWindowAssign INTEGER
101: Source1
|
132: Source32
Input format
-1: none
1: noSignal
2: unknown
0101: 1080-60p-LevelA
0102: 1080-59p-LevelA
0103: 1080-50p-LevelA
0104: 1080-60p-LevelB
0105: 1080-59p-LevelB
0106: 1080-50p-LevelB
0201: 1080-60i ( or 1080/30PsF)
0202: 1080-59i ( or 1080/29.97PsF)
0203: 1080-50i ( or 1080/25PsF)
0307: 1080-24psf
0308: 1080-23psf
0404: 1080-30p
0405: 1080-29p
0406: 1080-25p
0407: 1080-24p
0408: 1080-23p
0501: 1035-60i
0502: 1035-59i
Input video 0601: 720-60p
status 12.x mv1640IPWindowVideoFormat 0602: 720-59p INTEGER
0603: 720-50p
0607: 720-24p
0608: 720-23p
0701: 525-60
0702: 625-50
1201: 2160-59p
1202: 2160-50p
1203: 2160-60p
1301: 1080-59p-LevelA-2SI
1305: 1080-50p-LevelA-2SI
1309: 1080-59p-LevelB-2SI
1313: 1080-50p-LevelB-2SI
1317: 1080-60p-LevelA-2SI
1321: 1080-60p-LevelB-2SI
1325: 1080-30p-LevelC-2SI
1329: 1080-29p-LevelC-2SI
1333: 1080-25p-LevelC-2SI
1337: 1080-24p-LevelC-2SI
1341: 1080-23p-LevelC-2SI
1404: 2160-30p
1405: 2160-29p
1406: 2160-25p
1407: 2160-24p
1408: 2160-23p
Video loss detection status
-1: none
1: normal
13.x mv1640IPWindowVideoLoss 2: loss-A INTEGER
3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B
5: off

166
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
Video freeze detection status
-1: none
14.x mv1640IPWindowVideoFreeze 1: normal INTEGER
2: freeze
3: off
Video black level detection status
-1: none
15.x mv1640IPWindowVideoBlack 1: normal INTEGER
2: black
3: off
Video luminance over detection status
mv1640IPWindowVideoLumOv -1: none
16.x er 1: normal INTEGER
2: luminanceOver
3: off
Video CRC error detection status
-1: none
17.x mv1640IPWindowCrcError 1: normal INTEGER
2: crcError
3: off
2SI format error detection status
-1: none
18.x mv1640IPWindow2siFormat 1: normal INTEGER
2: siFormat
3: off
2SI link error detection status
-1: none
19.x mv1640IPWindow2siLink 1: normal INTEGER
2: siLink
3: off
Audio loss detection status
-1: none
1: normal
21.x mv1640IPWindowAudioLoss 2: loss-A INTEGER
3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B
5: off
Input audio Audio silence level detection status
status -1: none
22.x mv1640IPWindowAudioSilence 1: normal INTEGER
2: silence
3:off
Audio over level detection status
-1: none
23.x mv1640IPWindowAudioLvlOver 1: normal INTEGER
2: levelOver
3: off
AFD code detection status
-1: none
1: undefined
2: reserved
101: afd43-L169T (4:3-L 16:9 T)
102: afd43-L149T (4:3^L 14:9 T)
103: afd43-L169 (4:3-L>16:p)
104: afd43-F43 (4:3-F 4:3)
105: afd43-L169PRTD (4:3-L 16:9 PRTD)
Input AFD 106: afd43-L149 (4:3-L 14:9)
status 24.x mv1640IPWindowAnciAfd 107: afd43-FALT149 (4:3-F ALT 14:9) INTEGER
108: afd43-LALT149 (4:3-L ALT 14:9)
109: afd43-LALT43 (4:3-L ALT 4:3)
201: afd169-L169 (16:9-L>16:9)
202: afd169-F169 (16:9-F 16:9)
203: afd169-P43 (16:9-P 4:3)
204: afd169-FPRTD (16:9-F PRTD)
205: afd169-P149 (16:9-P 14:9)
206: afd169-PALT149 (16:9-P ALT 14:9)
207: afd169-FALT149 (16:9-F ALT 14:9)
208: afd169-FALT43 (16:9-F ALT 4:3)
Closed caption loss detection status
-1: none
25.x mv1640IPWindowAnciCcLoss 1: normal INTEGER
2: loss
Input closed 3:off
caption status Closed caption detection status
-1: none
26.x mv1640IPWindowAnciCcSts 1: undetected INTEGER
2: detected
3:off
Timecode loss detection status
-1: none
Input 1: normal
metadata 31.x mv1640IPWindowTimecodeLos 2: loss-A INTEGER
status s 3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B
5: off

167
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv1640IPGetIpStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].1 (mv1640IPSfpTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].1.1 (mv1640IPSfpEntry)
1.a mv1640IPSfpPort SFP port Index INTEGER
0 - 3: Port A - D
SFP module detection status
11.a mv1640IPSfpModule 0: detected INTEGER
1: undetected
Light output error detection status
12.a mv1640IPSfpLightNgTx 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
Output light level
13.a mv1640IPSfpLightLvTx INTEGER
1/10uWatt value
SFP status Light input detection status
14.a mv1640IPSfpLightLossRx 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
Light receiving level
15.a mv1640IPSfpLightLvRx INTEGER
1/10uWatt value
SFP detected temperature
16.a mv1640IPSfpTemp INTEGER
℃ value
SFP detected current
17.a mv1640IPSfpCurr INTEGER
2uA value
SFP detected voltage
18.a nv1640IPSfpVolt INTEGER
1/10mV value
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].2 (mv1640IPMacTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].2.1 (mv1640IPMacEntry)
1.a mv1640IPMacPort SFP port index INTEGER
0 - 3: Port A - D
MAC/PHY link detection status
11.a mv1640IPMacLink 0: detected INTEGER
1: undetected
MAC/PHY data packet error detection status
12.a mv1640IPMacPktRx 0: normal INTEGER
MAC/PHY 1: error
status MAC/PHY CRC error detection status
13.a mv1640IPMacFrmCrcRx INTEGER
Same as above
MAC/PHY IP checksum error detection status
14.a mv1640IPMacIpChksum INTEGER
Same as above
MAC/PHY UDP checksum error detection status
15.a mv1640IPMacUdpChksum INTEGER
Same as above
MAC/PHY buffer over detection status
16.a mv1640IPMacBufOverRx INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].3 (mv1640IPPtpStatus)
PTP packet receive detection status
1 mv1640IPPtpPktRx 0: detected INTEGER
1: undetected
PTP-Slave synchronization detection status
2 mv1640IPPtpSlvSync 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
PTP status Hold Over detection status
3 mv1640IPPtpHoldOver 0: lock INTEGER
1: unlock-hold over
4 mv1640IPPtpGmSel ID of the selecting GM OCTET STRING
SFP port selection status of BC/TC-SW
5 mv1640IPPtpSwSel 0: sfpA INTEGER
1: sfpB
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].4 (mv1640IPGetIpEncStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].4.1 (mv1640IPEncMainTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].4.1.1 (mv1640IPEncMainEntry)
IP output index (Main)
1.b mv1640IPEncChMain INTEGER
1 - 4: IP Output 1 to 4
IP output (Video/Main) overflow detection status
Encap(Main) 11.b mv1640IPEncOvfVideoMain 0: normal
INTEGER
status 1: error
2: disable
IP output (Audio/Main) overflow detection status
101.b mv1640IPEncOvfAudioMain INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].4.2 (mv1640IPEncSubTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].4.2.1 (mv1640IPEncSubEntry)
Encap(Sub) IP output index (Sub)
1.b mv1640IPEncChSub INTEGER
status 1 - 4: IP output 1 to 4

168
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
IP output (Video/Sub) overflow detection status
0: normal
11.b mv1640IPEncOvfVideoSub INTEGER
1: error
2: disable
IP output (Audio/Sub) overflow detection status
101.b mv1640IPEncOvfAudioSub INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].5 (mv1640IPDecapTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].5.1 (mv1640IPDecapEntry)
IP input index
1c mv1640IPDecapChannnel INTEGER
1-16: IP input 1 to 16
Decap status
2.c mv1640IPDecapMain IP input (Video/Main) decap status detection status * INTEGER
3.c mv1640IPDecapSub IP input (Video/Sub) decap status detection status * INTEGER
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].6 (mv1640IPGetIpSdiiStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].6.1 (mv1640IPSdiiMainTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].6.1.1 (mv1640IPSdiiMainEntry)
IP output index (Main)
1.b mv1640IPSdiiChMain INTEGER
1 - 4: IP output 1 to 4
SDI input signal (Video/Main) detection status for
SDI input Encap.
(Main) 11. b mv1640IPSdiiLossVideoMain INTEGER
0: normal
status 1: error
SDI input signal (Audio/Main) detection status for
101. mv1640IPSdiiLossAudioMain Encap INTEGER
b
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].6.2 (mv1640IPSdiiSubTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].6.2.1 (mv1640IPSdiiSubEntry)
IP output index (Sub)
1.b mv1640IPSdiiChSub INTEGER
1 - 4 : IP output 1 to 4
SDI input (Video/Sub) signal detection status for
SDI input Encap
(Sub) 11. b mv1640IPSdiiLossVideoSub INTEGER
0: normal
status 1: error
SDI input (Audio/Sub) signal detection status for
101.b mv1640IPSdiiLossAudioSub Encap INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].7 (mv1640IPGetIpSdioStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].7.1 (mv1640IPSdioMainTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].7.1.1 (mv1640IPSdioMainEntry)
IP input index (Main)
1.c mv1640IPSdioChMain INTEGER
1 - 16 : IP input 1 to 6
SDI signal (Video/Main) detection status after Decap
11.c mv1640IPSdioLossVideoMain 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
SDI output
(Main) SDI signal (Audio/Main) detection status after Decap
101.c mv1640IPSdioLossAudioMain INTEGER
status Same as above
SDI signal (Audio error/Main) detection status
102.c mv1640IPSdioErrAudioMain after Decap INTEGER
Same as above
SDI signal (Meta/Main) detection status after Decap
201.c mv1640IPSdioLossMetaMain INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].7.2 (mv1640IPSdioSubTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].7.2.1 (mv1640IPSdioSubEntry)
IP input index (Sub)
1.c mv1640IPSdioChSub INTEGER
1 - 16 : IP input 1 to 16
SDI signal (Video/Sub) detection status after Decap
11.c mv1640IPSdioLossVideoSub 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
SDI output
(Sub) SDI signal (Audio/Sub) detection status after Decap
101.c mv1640IPSdioLossAudioSub INTEGER
status Same as above
SDI signal (Audio error/Sub) detection status
102.c mv1640IPSdioErrAudioSub after Decap INTEGER
Same as above
SDI signal (Meta/Sub) detection status after Decap
201.c mv1640IPSdioLossMetaSub INTEGER
Same as above
* The “x” represents the Window number.
* The “a” represents the SFP port number, the “b” represents the IP output number, and the “c” represents the IP input number.

169
◆ TRAP List
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1.358.2 (mv1640IPTraps)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv1640IPTrapsUnitStatus)
FAN ALARM status
1 mv1640IPFan1StatusTrap 1: normal mv1640IPFan1Status
2: abnormal
2 mv1640IPFan2StatusTrap Same as above mv1640IPFan2Status
3 mv1640IPFan3StatusTrap Same as above mv1640IPFan3Status
4 mv1640IPFan4StatusTrap Same as above mv1640IPFan4Status
5 mv1640IPFan5StatusTrap Same as above mv1640IPFan5Status
6 mv1640IPFan6StatusTrap Same as above mv1640IPFan6Status
mv1640IPPowerUnit1Status Power unit 1 status
11 1: normal mv1640IPPowerUnit1Status
Trap 2: abnormal
Power unit 2 status
1: normal
12 mv1640IPPowerUnit2Status 2: abnormal mv1640IPPowerUnit2Status
Trap 3: notInstalled * When MV-1640PS
uninstalled.
Reference / Input / Ptp Lock status
mv1640IPGenlockStatusTra 1: locked
21 p 2: unlocked mv1640IPGenlockStatus
3: holdover
Reference input format
1: noSignal ※MV-1640IF uninstalled
Fixed to noSignal
2: ntsc
22 mv1640IPGenlockFormatTra 3: pal mv1640IPGenlockFormat
p 4: format1080-59i
5: format1080-50i
6: format720-59p
7: format720-50p
8: unsupported
Input Lock signal format
1: noSignal
2: unsupported
3: format525-60
4: format625-50
5: format1080-59i
23 mv1640IPInputLockFormatT mv1640IPInputLockFormat
rap 6: format1080-50i
Unit status 7: format720-59p
8: format720-50p
9: format1080-59p-LevelA
10: format1080-50p-LevelA
11: format1080-59p-LevelB
12: format1080-50p-LevelB
PtpLock signal format
24 mv1640IPPTPLockFormatTr 1: none Mv1640IPPtpLockFormat
ap 3: ptpDetect
Genlock type
25 mv1640IPGenlockTypeTrap 1: referenceLock
2: inputLock mv1640IPGenlockType
3: ptpLock
CLOCK1-4 LTC display status
1: normal - LTC normal input and display
31 mv1640IPLtc1StatusTrap 2: noSignal - No LTC input mv1640IPLtc1Status
3: normal-RTC - LTC normally input but
not displayed (RTC display
32 mv1640IPLtc2StatusTrap Same as above mv1640IPLtc2Status
33 mv1640IPLtc3StatusTrap Same as above mv1640IPLtc3Status
34 mv1640IPLtc4StatusTrap Same as above mv1640IPLtc4Status
MV-1640IP unit temperature status
1: normal
2: warning-85
3: warning-90
41 mv1640IPTempStatusTrap 4: warning-95 INTEGER
5: danger-100
6: danger-105
7: danger-110
8: danger-115
SNTP(Primary) communication status
1: disable
51 mv1640IPSntpPrimaryStatus 2: ok INTEGER
Trap 3: com-err
4: sync-err
5: over-err
mv1640IPSntpSecondarySta SNTP(Secondary) communication status
52 tusTrap Same as above INTEGER

170
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv1640IPTrapsOutputStatus)
HDMI Out format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
1 mv1640IPHdmiOutputForma 602: format720-59p mv1640IPHdmiOutputFormat
tTrap 603: format720-50p
920: format720x480-59p
921: format720x576-50p
1001: format2160-59p
1002: format2160-50p
SDI Out1 format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
2 mv1640IPSdiOutput1Format 602: format720-59p mv1640IPSdiOutput1Format
Trap 603: format720-50p
1001: format2160-59p
1002: format2160-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
SDI Out2 format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
mv1640IPSdiOutput2Format 202: format1080-59i
3 Trap 203: format1080-50i mv1640IPSdiOutput2Format
Output video 602: format720-59p
status 603: format720-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
4 mv1640IPSdiOutput3Format SDI Out3 format mv1640IPSdiOutput3Format
Trap Same as above
5 mv1640IPSdiOutput4Format SDI Out4 format mv1640IPSdiOutput4Format
Trap Same as above
IP Out1 format
1: noStream
2: detail
102: format1080-59p
mv1640IPIpOutput1FormatT 103: format1080-50p
6 202: format1080-59i mv1640IPIpOutput1Format
rap 203: format1080-50i
602: format720-59p
603: format720-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
mv1640IPIpOutput2FormatT IP Out2 format
7 rap Same as above mv1640IPIpOutput2Format
mv1640IPIpOutput3FormatT IP Out3 format
8 rap Same as above mv1640IPIpOutput3Format

9 mv1640IPIpOutput4FormatT IP Out4 format mv1640IPIpOutput4Format

rap Same as above

11 mv1640IPHdmiOutputHpdTr HDMI Out Hot Plug detection

1: unconnected mv1640IPHdmiOutputHpd
ap 2: connected
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv1640IPTrapsWindowStatus)
Window assign source no.
-1: none
Input video 1: notDisplay
11.x mv1640IPWindowVideoAssi 101: Source01 mv1640IPWindowChannel,
status gnTrap mv1640IPWindowAssign
|
132: Source32

171
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
Input format
-1: none
1: noSignal
2: unknown
0101: 1080-60p-LevelA
0102: 1080-59p-LevelA
0103: 1080-50p-LevelA
0104: 1080-60p-LevelB
0105: 1080-59p-LevelB
0106: 1080-50p-LevelB
0201: 1080-60i ( or 1080/30PsF)
0202: 1080-59i ( or 1080/29.97PsF)
0203: 1080-50i ( or 1080/25PsF)
0307: 1080-24psf
0308: 1080-23psf
0404: 1080-30p
0405: 1080-29p
0406: 1080-25p
0407: 1080-24p
0408: 1080-23p
0501: 1035-60i
0502: 1035-59i
0601: 720-60p
mv1640IPWindowVideoFor 0602: 720-59p mv1640IPWindowChannel,
12.x matTrap 0603: 720-50p mv1640IPWindowVideoFormat
0607: 720-24p
0608: 720-23p
0701: 525-60
0702: 625-50
1201: 2160-59p
1202: 2160-50p
1203: 2160-60p
1301: 1080-59p-LevelA-2SI
1305: 1080-50p-LevelA-2SI
1309: 1080-59p-LevelB-2SI
1313: 1080-50p-LevelB-2SI
1317: 1080-60p-LevelA-2SI
1321: 1080-60p-LevelB-2SI
1325: 1080-30p-LevelC-2SI
1329: 1080-29p-LevelC-2SI
1333: 1080-25p-LevelC-2SI
1337: 1080-24p-LevelC-2SI
1341: 1080-23p-LevelC-2SI
1404: 2160-30p
1405: 2160-29p
1406: 2160-25p
1407: 2160-24p
1408: 2160-23p
Video loss detection status
-1: none
mv1640IPWindowVideoLoss 1: normal mv1640IPWindowChannel,
13.x Trap mv1640IPWindowVideoLoss
2: loss-A
3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B
Video freeze detection status
14.x mv1640IPWindowVideoFree -1: none mv1640IPWindowChannel,
zeTrap 1: normal mv1640IPWindowVideoFreeze
2: freeze
Video black level detection status
15.x mv1640IPWindowVideoBlac -1: none mv1640IPWindowChannel,
kTrap 1: normal mv1640IPWindowVideoBlack
2: black
Video Luminance level detection status
mv1640IPWindowVideoLum -1: none mv1640IPWindowChannel,
16.x mv1640IPWindowVideoLumOv
OverTrap 1: normal er
2: luminanceOver
CRC error detection status
17.x mv1640IPWindowCrcErrorTr -1: none mv1640IPWindowChannel,
ap 1: normal mv1640IPWindowCrcError
2: crcError
2SI format error detection status
18.x mv1640IPWindow2siFormat -1: none mv1640IPWindowChannel,
Trap 1: normal mv1640IPWindow2siFormat
2: siFormat
2SI link error detection status
19.x mv1640IPWindow2siLinkTra -1: none mv1640IPWindowChannel,
p 1: normal mv1640IPWindow2siLink
2: siLink
Audio loss detection status
-1: none
Input video 21 mv1640IPWindowAudioLoss 1: normal mv1640IPWindowChannel,
status Trap 2: loss-A mv1640IPWindowAudioLoss
3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B

172
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
Audio silence level detection status mv1640IPWindowChannel,
22 mv1640IPWindowAudioSilen -1: none mv1640IPWindowAudioSilenc
ceTrap 1: normal
2: silence e
Audio over level detection status mv1640IPWindowChannel,
mv1640IPWindowAudioLvlO -1: none
23.x verTrap 1: normal mv1640IPWindowAudioLvlOve
2: levelOver r
AFD code detection status
-1: none
1: undefined
2: reserved
101: afd43-L169T (4:3-L 16:9 T)
102: afd43-L149T (4:3^L 14:9 T)
103: afd43-L169 (4:3-L>16:p)
104: afd43-F43 (4:3-F 4:3)
105: afd43-L169PRTD (4:3-L 16:9 PRTD)
AFD input mv1640IPWindowAnciAfdTr 106: afd43-L149 (4:3-L 14:9) mv1640IPWindowChannel,
status 24.x ap 107: afd43-FALT149 (4:3-F ALT 14:9) mv1640IPWindowAnciAfd
108: afd43-LALT149 (4:3-L ALT 14:9)
109: afd43-LALT43 (4:3-L ALT 4:3)
201: afd169-L169 (16:9-L>16:9)
202: afd169-F169 (16:9-F 16:9)
203: afd169-P43 (16:9-P 4:3)
204: afd169-FPRTD (16:9-F PRTD)
205: afd169-P149 (16:9-P 14:9)
206: afd169-PALT149 (16:9-P ALT 14:9)
207: afd169-FALT149 (16:9-F ALT 14:9)
208: afd169-FALT43 (16:9-F ALT 4:3)
Closed caption loss detection status
25.x mv1640IPWindowAnciCcLos -1: none
1: normal
mv1640IPWindowChannel,
sTrap mv1640IPWindowAnciCcLoss
Closed 2: loss
caption input
status Closed caption detection status
26.x mv1640IPWindowAnciCcSts -1: none mv1640IPWindowChannel,
Trap 1: undetected mv1640IPWindowAnciCc
2: detected
Timecode loss detection status
Input -1: none mv1640IPWindowChannel,
mv1640IPWindowTimecode 1: normal
metadata 27.x LossTrap 2: loss-A mv1640IPWindowTimecodeLo
status 3: loss-B ss
4: loss-A-B
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv1640IPTrapsIpStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].1 (mv1640IPTrapsIpSfpStatus)
SFP module detection status
mv1640IPSfpPort,
11.a mv1640IPSfpModuleTrap 0: detected
mv1640IPSfpModule
1: undetected
Light output error detection status
mv1640IPSfpPort,
12.a mv1640IPSfpLightNgTxTr 0: normal
ap mv1640IPSfpLightNgTx
1: error
Light output level error detection status mv1640IPSfpPort,
13.a mv1640IPSfpLightLvTxTra
p Same as above mv1640IPSfpLightLvTx
mv1640IPSfpLightLossRx Light input detection status mv1640IPSfpPort,
SFP status 14.a Trap
Same as above mv1640IPSfpLightLossRx
Light input level error detection status mv1640IPSfpPort,
15.a mv1640IPSfpLightLvRxTra
p Same as above mv1640IPSfpLightLvRx
Temperature error detection status mv1640IPSfpPort,
16.a mv1640IPSfpTempErrTrap
Same as above mv1640IPSfpTemp
Current error detection status mv1640IPSfpPort,
17.a mv1640IPSfpCurrErrTrap
Same as above mv1640IPSfpCurr
Voltage error detection status mv1640IPSfpPort,
18.a mv1640IPSfpVoltErrTrap
Same as above mv1640IPSfpVolt
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].2 (mv1640IPTrapsIpMacStatus)
PHY link detection status
mv1640IPMacPort,
11.a mv1640IPMacLinkTrap 0: detected
1: undetected mv1640IPMacLink
MAC/PHY data input error detection status
mv1640IPMacPort,
12.a mv1640IPMacPktRxTrap 0: normal
1: error mv1640IPMacPktRx
mv1640IPMacFrmCrcRxTr MAC/PHY frame CRC error detection status mv1640IPMacPort,
MAC/PHY 13.a
ap Same as above mv1640IPMacFrmCrcRx
Status
mv1640IPMacIpChksumTr MAC/PHY IP checksum error detection status mv1640IPMacPort,
14.a ap Same as above mv1640IPMacIpChksum
MAC/PHY UDP checksum error detection mv1640IPMacPort,
15.a mv1640IPMacUdpChksum status
Trap mv1640IPMacUdpChksum
Same as above
MAC/PHY buffer over detection status mv1640IPMacPort,
16.a mv1640IPMacFrmBufOver
Trap Same as above mv1640IPMacBufOverRx
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].3 (mv1640IPTrapsIpPtpStatus)

173
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
PTP packets receive detection status
1 mv1640IPPtpPktRxTrap 0: detected mv1640IPPtpPktRx
1: undetected
PTP-Slave synchronization detection status
2 mv1640IPPtpSlvSyncTrap 0: normal mv1640IPPtpSlvSync
1: error
PTP status Hold Over detection status
3 mv1640IPPtpHoldOverTra mv1640IPPtpHoldOver
p 0: lock
1: unlock-hold over
4 mv1640IPPtpGmSelTrap ID of the selecting GM mv1640IPPtpGmSel
SFP port selection status of BC/TC-SW
5 mv1640IPPtpSwSelTrap 0: sfpA mv1640IPPtpSwSel
1: sfpB
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].4 (mv1640IPTrapsIpEncStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].4.1 (mv1640IPTrapsIpEncMainStatus)
IP output (Video/Main) overflow detection
status mv1640IPEncChMain,
11.b mv1640IPEncOvfVideoMai
nTrap 0: normal mv1640IPEncOvfVideoMain
Enc(Main) 1: error
Status
IP output (Audio/Main) overflow detection mv1640IPEncChMain,
101.b mv1640IPEncOvfAudioMai status
nTrap mv1640IPEncOvfAudioMain
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].4.2 (mv1640IPTrapsIpEncSubStatus)
IP output (Video/Sub) overflow detection status mv1640IPEncChSub,
11.b mv1640IPEncOvfVideoSu
Enc(Sub) bTrap Same as above mv1640IPEncOvfVideoSub
status mv1640IPEncOvfAudioSu IP output (Audio/Sub) overflow detection status mv1640IPEncChSub,
101.b bTrap
Same as above mv1640IPEncOvfAudioSub
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].5 (mv1640IPTrapsIpDecapStatus)
2 mv1640IPDecapMainTrap IP input (Main) Decap detection status mv1640IPDecapMain
Dec status
3 mv1640IPDecapSubTrap IP input (Sub) Decap detection status mv1640IPDecapSub
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].6 (mv1640IPTrapsIpSdiiStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].6.1 (mv1640IPTrapsIpSdiiMainStatus)
SDI input signal (Video/Main) detection status
for Encap mv1640IPSdiiChMain,
11.b mv1640IPSdiiLossVideoM mv1640IPSdiiLossVideoMai
SDI ainTrap 0: normal
1: error n
input(Main)
Status SDI input signal (Audio/Main) detection status mv1640IPSdiiChMain,
101.b mv1640IPSdiiLossAudioM for Encap mv1640IPSdiiLossAudioMai
ainTrap
Same as above n
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].6.2 (mv1640IPTrapsIpSdiiSubStatus)
SDI input signal (Video/Sub) detection status mv1640IPSdiiChSub,
mv1640IPSdiiLossVideoS for Encap
11.b ubTrap
SDI input mv1640IPSdiiLossVideoSub
Same as above
(Sub)
status SDI input signal (Audio/Sub) detection status mv1640IPSdiiChSub,
mv1640IPSdiiLossAudioS for Encap
101.b ubTrap
Same as above mv1640IPSdiiLossAudioSub
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].7 (mv1640IPTrapsIpSdioStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].7.1 (mv1640IPTrapsIpSdioMainStatus)
SDI output signal (Video/Main) detection status mv1640IPSdioChMain,
after Decap
11.c mv1640IPSdioLossVideoM mv1640IPSdioLossVideoMai
ainTrap 0: normal n
1: error
SDI output signal (Audio/Main) detection status mv1640IPSdioChMain,
mv1640IPSdioLossAudioM after Decap
SDI output 101.c ainTrap mv1640IPSdioLossAudioMai
(Main) Same as above n
Status SDI output signal (Audio Error/Main) detection mv1640IPSdioChMain,
102.c mv1640IPSdioErrAudioMai status after Decap
nTrap mv1640IPSdioErrAudioMain
Same as above
SDI output signal (Meta/Main) detection status mv1640IPSdioChMain,
201.c mv1640IPSdioLossMetaM after Decap mv1640IPSdioLossMetaMai
ainTrap
Same as above n
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].7.2 (mv1640IPTrapsIpSdioSubStatus)
SDI output signal (Video/Sub) detection status mv1640IPSdioChSub,
mv1640IPSdioLossVideoS after Decap
11.c ubTrap
Same as above mv1640IPSdioLossVideoSub
SDI output signal (Audio/Sub) detection status mv1640IPSdioChSub,
101.c mv1640IPSdioLossAudioS after Decap
SDI output ubTrap mv1640IPSdioLossAudioSub
Same as above
(Sub)
status SDI output signal (Audio Error/Sub) detection
mv1640IPSdioChSub,
102.c mv1640IPSdioErrAudioSu status after Decap
bTrap mv1640IPSdioErrAudioSub
Same as above
SDI output signal (Meta/Sub) detection status
mv1640IPSdioChSub,
201.c mv1640IPSdioLossMetaS after Decap
ubTrap mv1640IPSdioLossMetaSub
Same as above

174
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
* The “x” represents the Window number.
* The “a” represents the SFP port number, the “b” represents the IP output number, and the “c” represents the IP
input number.

* Packet Fault error codes for Decap

When multiple errors are detected, the error codes are combined and displayed in hexadecimal.
For example, if the following three types of errors are detected, 0x00081020 is displayed.
0x00000020 (RXVID_RX_LOST)
0x00001000 (RXAUD_RX_LOST)
0x00080000 (RXANC_RX_LOST)

Error code Error Description

0x00000001 RXCOMN_LENGTH/CSUM_ERR UDP packet length or Checksum value is
invalid. The packet is discarded
ST2110 mode: ST2110-20 Video packet
ST2022-6 mode: ST2022 packet (Including Video, Audio, Meta data)
0x00000002 Reserved -
0x00000004 Reserved -
0x00000008 RXVID_INVALID_ORDER Packets received in invalid order
0x00000010 RXVID_PACKET_LOST Packet lost
0x00000020 RXVID_RX_LOST Packet not received
0x00000040 RXVID_HIT_BUFFER_FULL Receive buffer capacity is full
0x00000080 Reserved -
ST2110 mode: ST2110-30 Audio packet
0x00000100 Reserved -
0x00000200 Reserved -
0x00000400 RXAUD_INVALID_ORDER Packets received in invalid order
0x00000800 RXAUD_PACKET_LOST Packet lost
0x00001000 RXAUD_RX_LOST Packet not received
0x00002000 RXAUD_HIT_BUFFER_LOST Receive buffer capacity is full
0x00004000 Reserved -
ST2110 mode: ST2110-40 Meta packet
0x00008000 Reserved -
0x00010000 Reserved -
0x00020000 RXANC_INVALID_ORDER Packets received in invalid order
0x00040000 RXANC_PACKET_LOST Packet lost
0x00080000 RXANC_RX_LOST Packet not received
0x00100000 RXANC_HIT_BUFFER_FULL Receive buffer capacity is full
0x00200000 Reserved -
0x00400000 Reserved -
ST 2022-7: Lost packet on both streams
0x00800000 VID_BOTH_LOST Lost packets on both systems (Video)
0x01000000 AUD_BOTH_LOST Lost packets on both systems (Audio
0x02000000 ANC_BOTH_LOST Lost packets on both systems (ANC)
* If an error occurs regarding lost packet on both ST2022-7 streams, but the error can be resolved
by redundant configuration, SNMP Trap will not be reported.

175
MV-3240
◆ GET List
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1.360.1 (mv3240Get)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv3240GetUnitInfo)
1 mv3240UnitName Unit name Ex.: "MV-3240" OCTET STRING
Interface Slot installation status
2 mv3240IfSlotType 1: notInstalled INTEGER
2: installed
MV-3240(SDI Upper) 12G option installation
status
4 Mv3240SdiUpper12GOption 1: notInstalled INTEGER
2: installed
MV-3240(SDI Lower) 12Goption installation
5 Mv3240SdiLower12GOption status INTEGER
Unit 1: notInstalled
information 2: installed
11 mv3240SoftVer MV-3240(MAIN) software version Ex.: "01.00" OCTET STRING
12 mv3240Fpga1Ver MV-3240(MAIN) FPGA1 version OCTET STRING
13 mv3240Fpga2Ver MV-3240(MAIN) FPGA2 version OCTET STRING
14 mv3240CpldVer MV-3240(MAIN) CPLD version OCTET STRING
18 mv3240SdiUpperFpgaVer MV-3240(SDI Upper)FPGA version OCTET STRING
19 mv3240SdiUpperCpldVer MV-3240(SDI Upper)CPLD version OCTET STRING
20 mv3240SdiLowerFpgaVer MV-3240(SDI Lower)FPGA version OCTET STRING
21 mv3240SdiLowerCpldVer MV-3240(SDI Lower)CPLD version OCTET STRING
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv3240GetUnitStatus)
FAN ALARM status
1 mv3240Fan1Status 1: normal INTEGER
2: abnormal
2 mv3240Fan2Status Same as above INTEGER
3 mv3240Fan3Status Same as above INTEGER
4 mv3240Fan4Status Same as above INTEGER
5 mv3240Fan5Status Same as above INTEGER
6 mv3240Fan6Status Same as above INTEGER
Power unit 1 status
11 mv3240PowerUnit1Status 1: normal INTEGER
2: abnormal
Power unit 2 status
12 mv3240PowerUnit2Status 1: normal INTEGER
2: abnormal
3: notInstalled * When MV-1640PS uninstalled
Reference / Input Lock sync status
21 mv3240GenlockStatus 1: locked INTEGER
2: unlocked
Reference input format
1: noSignal *When MV-1640IF uninstalled
2: ntsc
3: pal
22 mv3240GenlockFormat 4: format1080-59i INTEGER
5: format1080-50i
Unit status 6: format720-59p
7: format720-50p
8: unsupported
Input Lock signal format
1: noSignal
2: unsupported
3: format525-60
4: format625-50
5: format1080-59i
23 mv3240InputLockFormat 6: format1080/50i INTEGER
7: format720-59p
8: format720-50p
9: format1080-59p-LevelA
10: format1080-50p-LevelA
11: format1080-59p-LevelB
12: format1080-50p-LevelB
Genlock type
25 mv3240GenlockType 1: referenceLock INTEGER
2: inputLock
CLOCK1-4 LTC display status
1: normal - LTC normally input and displayed
31 mv3240Ltc1Status 2: noSignal - No LTC input INTEGER
3: normal-RTC - LTC normally input but not
displayed (RTC displayed)
32 mv3240Ltc2Status Same as above INTEGER
33 mv3240Ltc3Status Same as above INTEGER
34 mv3240Ltc4Status Same as above INTEGER

176
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
Unit temperature status
1: normal
2: warning-85
3: warning-90
41 mv3240TempStatus 4: warning-95 INTEGER
5: danger-100
6: danger-105
7: danger-110
8: danger-115
SNTP(Primary) communication status
1: disable
2: ok
51 mv3240SntpPrimaryStatus 3: com-err INTEGER
4: sync-err
5: over-err
SNTP(Secondary) communication status
52 mv3240SntpSecondaryStatus INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv3240GetOutputStatus)
HDMI Out format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
1 mv3240HdmiOutputFormat 602: format720-59p INTEGER
603: format720-50p
920: format720x480-59p
921: format720x576-50p
1001: format2160-59p
1002: format2160-50p
SDI Out1 format
102 : format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
2 mv3240SdiOutput1Format 602: format720-59p INTEGER
603: format720-50p
1001: format2160-59p
Output video 1002: format2160-50p
status 1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
SDI Out2 format
102 : format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
3 mv3240SdiOutput2Format 203: format1080-50i INTEGER
602: format720-59p
603: format720-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
SDI Out3 format
4 mv3240SdiOutput3Format INTEGER
Same as above
SDI Out4 format
5 mv3240SdiOutput4Format INTEGER
Same as above
HDMI Out Hot Plug detection
11 mv3240HdmiOutputHpd 1: unconnected INTEGER
2: connected
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv3240WindowTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link].1 (mv3240WindowEntry)
Window index
1.x mv3240WindowChannel 4K layout mode 1-25: Window 1-25 INTEGER
2K layout mode 1-35: Window 1-35
Input video Window assign source no. 1-32
status -1: none
11.x mv3240WindowAssign 1: notDisplayed INTEGER
101: Source1
|
132: Source32

177
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
Input format
-1: none
1: noSignal
2: unknown
0101: 1080-60p-LevelA
0102: 1080-59p-LevelA
0103: 1080-50p-LevelA
0104: 1080-60p-LevelB
0105: 1080-59p-LevelB
0106: 1080-50p-LevelB
0201: 1080-60i ( or 1080/30PsF)
0202: 1080-59i ( or 1080/29.97PsF)
0203: 1080-50i ( or 1080/25PsF)
0307: 1080-24psf
0308: 1080-23psf
0404: 1080-30p
0405: 1080-29p
0406: 1080-25p
0407: 1080-24p
0408: 1080-23p
0501: 1035-60i
0502: 1035-59i
0601: 720-60p
0602: 720-59p
12.x mv3240WindowVideoFormat 0603: 720-50p INTEGER
0607: 720-24p
0608: 720-23p
0701: 525-60
0702: 625-50
1201: 2160-59p
1202: 2160-50p
1203: 2160-60p
1301: 1080-59p-LevelA-2SI
1305: 1080-50p-LevelA-2SI
1309: 1080-59p-LevelB-2SI
1313: 1080-50p-LevelB-2SI
1317: 1080-60p-LevelA-2SI
1321: 1080-60p-LevelB-2SI
1325: 1080-30p-LevelC-2SI
1329: 1080-29p-LevelC-2SI
1333: 1080-25p-LevelC-2SI
1337: 1080-24p-LevelC-2SI
1341: 1080-23p-LevelC-2SI
1404: 2160-30p
1405: 2160-29p
1406: 2160-25p
1407: 2160-24p
1408: 2160-23p
Video loss detection status
13.x mv3240WindowVideoLoss -1: none INTEGER
1: normal
2: loss
Video freeze detection status
-1: none
14.x mv3240WindowVideoFreeze 1: normal INTEGER
2: freeze
3: off
Video black level detection status
-1: none
15.x mv3240WindowVideoBlack 1: normal INTEGER
2: black
3: off
Video luminance over detection status
-1: none
16.x mv3240WindowVideoLumOver 1: normal INTEGER
2: luminanceOver
3: off
Video CRC error detection status
-1: none
17.x mv3240WindowCrcError 1: normal INTEGER
2: crcError
3: off
2SI format error detection status
-1: none
18.x mv3240Window2siFormat 1: normal INTEGER
2: siFormat
3: off
2SI link error detection status
-1: none
19.x mv3240Window2siLink 1: normal INTEGER
2: siLink
3: off
Audio loss detection status
Input audio 21.x mv3240WindowAudioLoss -1: none INTEGER
status 1: normal
2: loss

178
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
Audio silence level detection status
-1: none
22.x mv3240WindowAudioSilence 1: normal INTEGER
2: silence
3:off
Audio over level detection status
-1: none
23.x mv3240WindowAudioLvlOver 1: normal INTEGER
2: levelOver
3:off
AFD code detection status
-1: none
1: undefined
2: reserved
101: afd43-L169T (4:3-L 16:9 T)
102: afd43-L149T (4:3^L 14:9 T)
103: afd43-L169 (4:3-L>16:p)
104: afd43-F43 (4:3-F 4:3)
105: afd43-L169PRTD (4:3-L 16:9 PRTD)
Input AFD 106: afd43-L149 (4:3-L 14:9)
24.x mv3240WindowAnciAfd 107: afd43-FALT149 (4:3-F ALT 14:9) INTEGER
status
108: afd43-LALT149 (4:3-L ALT 14:9)
109: afd43-LALT43 (4:3-L ALT 4:3)
201: afd169-L169 (16:9-L>16:9)
202: afd169-F169 (16:9-F 16:9)
203: afd169-P43 (16:9-P 4:3)
204: afd169-FPRTD (16:9-F PRTD)
205: afd169-P149 (16:9-P 14:9)
206: afd169-PALT149 (16:9-P ALT 14:9)
207: afd169-FALT149 (16:9-F ALT 14:9)
208: afd169-FALT43 (16:9-F ALT 4:3)
Closed caption loss detection status
-1: none
25.x mv3240WindowAnciCcLoss 1: normal INTEGER
2: loss
Input closed 3:off
caption status Closed caption detection status
-1: none
26.x mv3240WindowAnciCcSts 1: undetected INTEGER
2: detected
3:off
* The “x” represents Window number

179
◆ TRAP List
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1.360.2 (mv3240Traps)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv3240TrapsUnitStatus)
FAN ALARM status
1 mv3240Fan1StatusTrap 1: normal mv3240Fan1Status
2: abnormal
2 mv3240Fan2StatusTrap Same as above mv3240Fan2Status
3 mv3240Fan3StatusTrap Same as above mv3240Fan3Status
4 mv3240Fan4StatusTrap Same as above mv3240Fan4Status
5 mv3240Fan5StatusTrap Same as above mv3240Fan5Status
6 mv3240Fan6StatusTrap Same as above mv3240Fan6Status
mv3240PowerUnit1StatusTr Power unit 1 status
11 1: normal mv3240PowerUnit1Status
ap 2: abnormal
Power unit 2 status
1: normal
12 mv3240PowerUnit2StatusTr 2: abnormal mv3240PowerUnit2Status
ap 3: notInstalled * When MV-1640PS
uninstalled.
Reference / Input Lock status
21 mv3240GenlockStatusTrap 1: locked mv3240GenlockStatus
2: unlocked
Reference input format
1: noSignal ※MV-1640IF uninstalled
Fixed to noSignal
2: ntsc
22 mv3240GenlockFormatTrap 3: pal mv3240GenlockFormat
4: format1080-59i
5: format1080-50i
6: format720-59p
7: format720-50p
8: unsupported
Input Lock signal format
1: noSignal
2: unsupported
3: format525-60
4: format625-50
23 mv3240InputLockFormatTra 5: format1080-59i
6: format1080-50i mv3240InputLockFormat
Unit status p 7: format720-59p
8: format720-50p
9: format1080-59p-LevelA
10: format1080-50p-LevelA
11: format1080-59p-LevelB
12: format1080-50p-LevelB
Genlock type
25 mv3240GenlockTypeTrap 1: referenceLock mv3240GenlockType
2: inputLock
3: ptpLock
CLOCK1-4 LTC display status
1: normal - LTC normally input and
31 mv3240Ltc1StatusTrap displayed mv3240Ltc1Status
2: noSignal - No LTC input
3: normal-RTC - LTC normally input but
not displayed (RTC display
32 mv3240Ltc2StatusTrap Same as above mv3240Ltc2Status
33 mv3240Ltc3StatusTrap Same as above mv3240Ltc3Status
34 mv3240Ltc4StatusTrap Same as above mv3240Ltc4Status
MV3240 unit temperature status
1: normal
2: warning-85
3: warning-90
41 mv3240TempStatusTrap 4: warning-95 INTEGER
5: danger-100
6: danger-105
7: danger-110
8: danger-115
SNTP(Primary) communication status
1: disable
mv3240SntpPrimaryStatusTr 2: ok
51 ap 3: com-err INTEGER
4: sync-err
5: over-err
52 mv3240SntpSecondaryStatu SNTP(Secondary) communication status INTEGER
sTrap Same as above

180
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv3240TrapsOutputStatus)
HDMI Out format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
1 mv3240HdmiOutputFormatT 602: format720-59p mv3240HdmiOutputFormat
rap 603: format720-50p
920: format720x480-59p
921: format720x576-50p
1001: format2160-59p
1002: format2160-50p
SDI Out1 format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
2 mv3240SdiOutput1FormatTr 602: format720-59p mv3240SdiOutput1Format
ap 603: format720-50p
Output video 1001: format2160-59p
status 1002: format2160-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
SDI Out2 format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
mv3240SdiOutput2FormatTr 202: format1080-59i
3 ap 203: format1080-50i mv3240SdiOutput2Format
602: format720-59p
603: format720-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
4 mv3240SdiOutput3FormatTr SDI Out3 format mv3240SdiOutput3Format
ap Same as above
5 mv3240SdiOutput4FormatTr SDI Out4 format mv3240SdiOutput4Format
ap Same as above
HDMI Out Hot Plug detection
11 mv3240HdmiOutputHpdTrap 1: unconnected mv3240HdmiOutputHpd
2: connected
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.[Link] (mv3240TrapsWindowStatus)
Window assign source no.
-1: none
1: notDisplay
11.x mv3240WindowVideoAssign 101: Source01 mv3240WindowChannel,
Trap mv3240WindowAssign
|
132: Source32
Input format
-1: none
1: noSignal
2: unknown
0101: 1080-60p-LevelA
0102: 1080-59p-LevelA
0103: 1080-50p-LevelA
0104: 1080-60p-LevelB
0105: 1080-59p-LevelB
0106: 1080-50p-LevelB
0201: 1080-60i ( or 1080/30PsF)
0202: 1080-59i ( or 1080/29.97PsF)
0203: 1080-50i ( or 1080/25PsF)
0307: 1080-24psf
0308: 1080-23psf
0404: 1080-30p
Input video 0405: 1080-29p
status 0406: 1080-25p
0407: 1080-24p
12.x mv3240WindowVideoFormat 0408: 1080-23p mv3240WindowChannel,
Trap 0501: 1035-60i mv3240WindowVideoFormat
0502: 1035-59i
0601: 720-60p
0602: 720-59p
0603: 720-50p
0607: 720-24p
0608: 720-23p
0701: 525-60
0702: 625-50
1201: 2160-59p
1202: 2160-50p
1203: 2160-60p
1301: 1080-59p-LevelA-2SI
1305: 1080-50p-LevelA-2SI
1309: 1080-59p-LevelB-2SI
1313: 1080-50p-LevelB-2SI
1317: 1080-60p-LevelA-2SI
1321: 1080-60p-LevelB-2SI
1325: 1080-30p-LevelC-2SI
1329: 1080-29p-LevelC-2SI

181
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
1333: 1080-25p-LevelC-2SI
1337: 1080-24p-LevelC-2SI
1341: 1080-23p-LevelC-2SI
1404: 2160-30p
1405: 2160-29p
1406: 2160-25p
1407: 2160-24p
1408: 2160-23p
Video loss detection status
-1: none
mv3240WindowVideoLossTr 1: normal mv3240WindowChannel,
13.x ap mv3240WindowVideoLoss
2: loss-A
3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B
Video freeze detection status
14.x mv3240WindowVideoFreeze -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
Trap 1: normal mv3240WindowVideoFreeze
2: freeze
Video black level detection status
15.x mv3240WindowVideoBlackT -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
rap 1: normal mv3240WindowVideoBlack
2: black
Video Luminance level detection status
16.x mv3240WindowVideoLumOv -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
erTrap 1: normal mv3240WindowVideoLumOver
2: luminanceOver
CRC error detection status
17.x mv3240WindowCrcErrorTra -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
p 1: normal mv3240WindowCrcError
2: crcError
2SI format error detection status
18.x mv3240Window2siFormatTr -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
ap 1: normal mv3240Window2siFormat
2: siFormat
2SI link error detection status
19.x mv3240Window2siLinkTrap -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
1: normal mv3240Window2siLink
2: siLink
Audio loss detection status
21 mv3240WindowAudioLossTr -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
ap 1: normal mv3240WindowAudioLoss
2: loss
Audio silence level detection status
Input video 22 mv3240WindowAudioSilenc -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
status eTrap 1: normal mv3240WindowAudioSilence
2: silence
Audio over level detection status
23.x mv3240WindowAudioLvlOve -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
rTrap 1: normal mv3240WindowAudioLvlOver
2: levelOver
AFD code detection status
-1: none
1: undefined
2: reserved
101: afd43-L169T (4:3-L 16:9 T)
102: afd43-L149T (4:3^L 14:9 T)
103: afd43-L169 (4:3-L>16:p)
104: afd43-F43 (4:3-F 4:3)
105: afd43-L169PRTD (4:3-L 16:9 PRTD)
AFD input 106: afd43-L149 (4:3-L 14:9) mv3240WindowChannel,
status 24.x mv3240WindowAnciAfdTrap 107: afd43-FALT149 (4:3-F ALT 14:9) mv3240WindowAnciAfd
108: afd43-LALT149 (4:3-L ALT 14:9)
109: afd43-LALT43 (4:3-L ALT 4:3)
201: afd169-L169 (16:9-L>16:9)
202: afd169-F169 (16:9-F 16:9)
203: afd169-P43 (16:9-P 4:3)
204: afd169-FPRTD (16:9-F PRTD)
205: afd169-P149 (16:9-P 14:9)
206: afd169-PALT149 (16:9-P ALT 14:9)
207: afd169-FALT149 (16:9-F ALT 14:9)
208: afd169-FALT43 (16:9-F ALT 4:3)
Closed caption loss detection status
mv3240WindowAnciCcLoss -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
25.x Trap 1: normal mv3240WindowAnciCcLoss
Closed 2: loss
caption input
status Closed caption detection status
26.x mv3240WindowAnciCcStsTr -1: none mv3240WindowChannel,
ap 1: undetected mv3240WindowAnciCc
2: detected
* The “x” represents Window number

182
MV-3240IP

◆ GET List
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.1 (mv3240IPGet)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.1.1 (mv3240IPGetUnitInfo)
1 mv3240IPUnitName Unit name Ex.: "MV-3240IP" OCTET STRING
Interface Slot installation status
2 mv3240IPIfSlotType 1: notInstalled INTEGER
2: installed
11 mv3240IPSoftVer MV-3240IP(MAIN) software version OCTET STRING
Ex.: "01.00"
Unit 12 mv3240IPFpga1Ver MV-3240IP(MAIN) FPGA1 version OCTET STRING
information 13 mv3240IPFpga2Ver MV-3240IP(MAIN) FPGA2 version OCTET STRING
14 mv3240IPCpldVer MV-3240IP(MAIN) CPLD version OCTET STRING
15 mv3240IPVoIPSoftVer MV-3240IP(VoIP) software version OCTET STRING
16 mv3240IPVoIPBaseVer MV-3240IP(VoIP) BASE version OCTET STRING
17 mv3240IPVoIPUnitVer MV-3240IP(VoIP)UNIT version OCTET STRING
22 mv3240IPVoIPUnit2Ver MV-3240IP(VoIP)UNIT2 version OCTET STRING
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.1.2 (mv3240IPGetUnitStatus)
FAN ALARM status
1 mv3240IPFan1Status 1: normal INTEGER
2: abnormal
2 mv3240IPFan2Status Same as above INTEGER
3 mv3240IPFan3Status Same as above INTEGER
4 mv3240IPFan4Status Same as above INTEGER
5 mv3240IPFan5Status Same as above INTEGER
6 mv3240IPFan6Status Same as above INTEGER
Power unit 1 status
11 mv3240IPPowerUnit1Status 1: normal INTEGER
2: abnormal
Power unit 2 status
12 mv3240IPPowerUnit2Status 1: normal INTEGER
Unit status 2: abnormal
3: notInstalled * When MV-1640PS uninstalled
Reference / Input / PTP Lock sync status
1: locked
21 mv3240IPGenlockStatus 2: unlocked INTEGER
3: holdover
Reference input format
1: noSignal *When MV-1640IF uninstalled
2: ntsc
3: pal
22 mv3240IPGenlockFormat 4: format1080-59i INTEGER
5: format1080-50i
6: format720-59p
7: format720-50p
8: unsupported
PTPLock signal format
24 mv3240IPPTPLockFormat 1: none INTEGER
2: ptpDetect
Genlock type
25 mv3240IPGenlockType 1: referenceLock INTEGER
3: ptplock
CLOCK1-4 LTC display status
1: normal - LTC normally input and displayed
31 mv3240IPLtc1Status 2: noSignal - No LTC input INTEGER
3: normal-RTC - LTC normally input but not
displayed (RTC displayed)
32 mv3240IPLtc2Status Same as above INTEGER
33 mv3240IPLtc3Status Same as above INTEGER
34 mv3240IPLtc4Status Same as above INTEGER
Unit status Unit temperature status
1: normal
2: warning-85
3: warning-90
41 mv3240IPTempStatus 4: warning-95 INTEGER
5: danger-100
6: danger-105
7: danger-110
8: danger-115
SNTP(Primary) communication status
1: disable
51 mv3240IPSntpPrimaryStatus 2: ok INTEGER
3: com-err
4: sync-err
5: over-err
SNTP(Secondary)Communication status
52 mv3240IPSntpSecondaryStatus INTEGER
Same as above

183
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.1.3 (mv3240IPGetOutputStatus)
HDMI Out format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
1 mv3240IPHdmiOutputFormat 602: format720-59p INTEGER
603: format720-50p
920: format720x480-59p
921: format720x576-50p
1001: format2160-59p
1002: format2160-50p
SDI Out1 format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
2 mv3240IPSdiOutput1Format 602: format720-59p INTEGER
603: format720-50p
1001: format2160-59p
1002: format2160-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
SDI Out2 format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
3 mv3240IPSdiOutput2Format 203: format1080-50i INTEGER
Output video 602: format720-59p
status 603: format720-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
4 mv3240IPSdiOutput3Format SDI Out3 format INTEGER
Same as above
SDI Out4 format
5 mv3240IPSdiOutput4Format Same as above INTEGER
IP Out1 format
1: noStream
2: detail
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
6 mv3240IPIpOutput1Format 202: format1080-59i INTEGER
203: format1080-50i
602: format720-59p
603: format720-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
IP Out2 format
7 mv3240IPIpOutput2Format Same as above INTEGER
IP Out3 format
8 mv3240IPIpOutput3Format Same as above INTEGER

9 mv3240IPIpOutput4Format IP Out4 format INTEGER

Same as above
HDMI Out Hot Plug detection
11 mv3240IPHdmiOutputHpd 1: unconnected INTEGER
2: connected
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.1.4 (mv3240IPWindowTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPWindowEntry)
1.x mv3240IPWindowChannel Window index1-25 INTEGER
1-25: Window 1-25
Window assign source no. 1-32
Input video
status -1: none
1: notDisplayed
11.x mv3240IPWindowAssign INTEGER
101: Source1
|
132: Source32

184
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
Input format
-1: none
1: noSignal
2: unknown
0101: 1080-60p-LevelA
0102: 1080-59p-LevelA
0103: 1080-50p-LevelA
0104: 1080-60p-LevelB
0105: 1080-59p-LevelB
0106: 1080-50p-LevelB
0201: 1080-60i ( or 1080/30PsF)
0202: 1080-59i ( or 1080/29.97PsF)
0203: 1080-50i ( or 1080/25PsF)
0307: 1080-24psf
0308: 1080-23psf
0404: 1080-30p
0405: 1080-29p
0406: 1080-25p
0407: 1080-24p
0408: 1080-23p
0501: 1035-60i
0502: 1035-59i
0601: 720-60p
0602: 720-59p
12.x mv3240IPWindowVideoFormat 0603: 720-50p INTEGER
0607: 720-24p
0608: 720-23p
0701: 525-60
0702: 625-50
1201: 2160-59p
1202: 2160-50p
1203: 2160-60p
1301: 1080-59p-LevelA-2SI
1305: 1080-50p-LevelA-2SI
1309: 1080-59p-LevelB-2SI
1313: 1080-50p-LevelB-2SI
1317: 1080-60p-LevelA-2SI
1321: 1080-60p-LevelB-2SI
1325: 1080-30p-LevelC-2SI
1329: 1080-29p-LevelC-2SI
1333: 1080-25p-LevelC-2SI
1337: 1080-24p-LevelC-2SI
1341: 1080-23p-LevelC-2SI
1404: 2160-30p
1405: 2160-29p
1406: 2160-25p
1407: 2160-24p
1408: 2160-23p
Video loss detection status
-1: none
1: normal
13.x mv3240IPWindowVideoLoss 2: loss-A INTEGER
3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B
5: off
Video freeze detection status
-1: none
14.x mv3240IPWindowVideoFreeze 1: normal INTEGER
2: freeze
3: off
Video black level detection status
-1: none
15.x mv3240IPWindowVideoBlack 1: normal INTEGER
2: black
3: off
Video luminance over detection status
-1: none
16.x mv3240IPWindowVideoLumOve 1: normal INTEGER
r 2: luminanceOver
3: off
Video CRC error detection status
-1: none
17.x mv3240IPWindowCrcError 1: normal INTEGER
2: crcError
3: off
Audio loss detection status
-1: none
Input audio 1: normal
21.x mv3240IPWindowAudioLoss 2: loss-A INTEGER
status
3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B
5: off

185
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
Audio silence level detection status
-1: none
22.x mv3240IPWindowAudioSilence 1: normal INTEGER
2: silence
3:off
Audio over level detection status
-1: none
23.x mv3240IPWindowAudioLvlOver 1: normal INTEGER
2: levelOver
3:off
Closed caption loss detection status
-1: none
25.x mv3240IPWindowAnciCcLoss 1: normal INTEGER
2: loss
Input closed 3: off
caption Closed caption detection status
status
-1: none
26.x mv3240IPWindowAnciCcSts 1: undetected INTEGER
2: detected
3:off
Timecode loss detection status
-1: none
Input 1: normal
metadata 27.x mv3240IPWindowTimecodeLoss 2: loss-A INTEGER
status 3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B
5: off
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.1.5 (mv3240IPGetIpStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPSfpTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1 (mv3240IPSfpEntry)
1.a mv3240IPSfpPort SFP port index INTEGER
0 - 7: Port A - H
SFP module detection status
11.a mv3240IPSfpModule 0: detected INTEGER
1: undetected
Light output error detection status
12.a mv3240IPSfpLightNgTx 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
Output light level
13.a mv3240IPSfpLightLvTx INTEGER
1/10uWatt value
SFP status Light input detection status
14.a mv3240IPSfpLightLossRx 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
Light receiving level
15.a mv3240IPSfpLightLvRx INTEGER
1/10uWatt value
SFP detected temperature
16.a mv3240IPSfpTemp INTEGER
℃ value
SFP detected current
17.a mv3240IPSfpCurr INTEGER
2uA value
SFP detected voltage
18.a mv3240IPSfpVolt INTEGER
1/10mV value
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPMacTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1 (mv3240IPMacEntry)
SFP Port index
1.a mv3240IPMacPort INTEGER
0 - 7: Port A - H
MAC/PHY link detection status
11.a mv3240IPMacLink 0: detected INTEGER
1: undetected
MAC/PHY data packet error detection status
12.a mv3240IPMacPktRx 0: normal INTEGER
MAC/PHY 1: error
status MAC/PHY CRC error detection status
13.a mv3240IPMacFrmCrcRx INTEGER
Same as above
MAC/PHY IP checksum error detection status
14.a mv3240IPMacIpChksum INTEGER
Same as above
MAC/PHY UDP checksum error detection status
15.a mv3240IPMacUdpChksum INTEGER
Same as above
MAC/PHY buffer over detection status
16.a mv3240IPMacBufOverRx INTEGER
Same as above

186
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPPtpStatus)
PTP packet receive detection status
1 mv3240IPPtpPktRx 0: detected INTEGER
1: undetected
PTP-Slave synchronization detection status
2 mv3240IPPtpSlvSync 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
Hold Over detection status
3 mv3240IPPtpHoldOver 0: lock INTEGER
1: unlock-hold over
4 mv3240IPPtpGmSel ID of the selecting GM OCTET STRING
SFP port selection status of BC/TC-SW
5 mv3240IPPtpSwSel 0: sfpA INTEGER
1: sfpB
PTP status
PTP packet receive detection status (unit 2)
11 mv3240IPPtpPktRx2 0: detected INTEGER
1: undetected
PTP-Slave synchronization detection status (unit 2)
12 mv3240IPPtpSlvSync2 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
Hold Over detection status (unit 2)
13 mv3240IPPtpHoldOver2 0: lock INTEGER
1: unlock-hold over
14 mv3240IPPtpGmSel2 ID of the selecting GM (unit 2) OCTET STRING
SFP port selection status of BC/TC-SW (unit 2)
15 mv3240IPPtpSwSel2 0: sfpA INTEGER
1: sfpB
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPGetIpEncStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1 (mv3240IPEncMainTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1.1 (mv3240IPEncMainEntry)
IP output index (Main)
1.b mv3240IPEncChMain INTEGER
1 - 4: IP Output 1 to 4
IP output (Video/Main) overflow detection status
Encap(Main) 11.b mv3240IPEncOvfVideoMain 0: normal
INTEGER
status 1: error
2: disable
IP output (Audio/Main) overflow detection status
101.b mv3240IPEncOvfAudioMain INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].2 (mv3240IPEncSubTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].2.1 (mv3240IPEncSubEntry)
IP output index (Sub)
1.b mv3240IPEncChSub INTEGER
1 - 4: IP output 1 to 4
IP output (Video/Sub) overflow detection status
Encap(Sub) 0: normal
status 11.b mv3240IPEncOvfVideoSub INTEGER
1: error
2: disable
IP output (Audio/Sub) overflow detection status
101.b mv3240IPEncOvfAudioSub INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPDecapTable )
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1 (mv3240IPDecapEntry)
IP input index
1.c mv3240IPDecapChannnel INTEGER
Decap 1-32: IP input 1 to 32
status 2.c mv3240IPDecapMain IP input (Video/Main) decap status detection status * INTEGER
3.c mv3240IPDecapSub IP input (Video/Sub) decap status detection status * INTEGER

187
Object group OID MIB Object Name Settings Type
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPGetIpSdiiStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1 (mv3240IPSdiiMainTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1.1 (mv3240IPSdiiMainEntry)
IP output index (Main)
1.b mv3240IPSdiiChMain INTEGER
1 - 4: IP output 1 to 4
SDI input signal (Video/Main) detection status for
Encap.
SDI Input 11.b mv3240IPSdiiLossVideoMain INTEGER
(Main) status 0: normal
1: error
SDI input signal (Audio/Main) detection status for
101.b mv3240IPSdiiLossAudioMain Encap INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].2 (mv3240IPSdiiSubTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].2.1 (mv3240IPSdiiSubEntry)
IP output index (Sub)
1.b mv3240IPSdiiChSub INTEGER
1 - 4 : IP output 1 to 4
SDI input (Video/Sub) signal detection status for
Encap
SDI input 11.b mv3240IPSdiiLossVideoSub INTEGER
(Sub) status 0: normal
1: error
SDI input (Audio/Sub) signal detection status for
101.b mv3240IPSdiiLossAudioSub Encap INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPGetIpSdioStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1 (mv3240IPSdioMainTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1.1 (mv3240IPSdioMainEntry)
IIP input index (Main)
1.c mv3240IPSdioChMain INTEGER
17 - 32: IP input 17 to 32
SDI signal (Video/Main) detection status after Decap
11.c mv3240IPSdioLossVideoMain 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
SDI output SDI signal (Audio/Main) detection status after Decap
(Main) status 101.c mv3240IPSdioLossAudioMain Same as above
INTEGER
SDI signal (Audio error/Main) detection status after
102.c mv3240IPSdioErrAudioMain Decap INTEGER
Same as above
SDI signal (Meta/Main) detection status after Decap
201.c mv3240IPSdioLossMetaMain INTEGER
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].2 (mv3240IPSdioSubTable)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].2.1 (mv3240IPSdioSubEntry)
IP input index (Sub)
1.c mv3240IPSdioChSub INTEGER
17 - 32: IP input 17 to 32
SDI signal (Video/Sub) detection status after Decap
11.c mv3240IPSdioLossVideoSub 0: normal INTEGER
1: error
SDI output SDI signal (Audio/Sub) detection status after Decap
(Sub) Status 101.c mv3240IPSdioLossAudioSub Same as above
INTEGER
SDI signal (Audio error/Sub) detection status after
102.c mv3240IPSdioErrAudioSub Decap INTEGER
Same as above
SDI signal (Meta/Sub) detection status after Decap
201.c mv3240IPSdioLossMetaSub INTEGER
Same as above
* The “x” represents the Window number.
* The “a” represents the SFP port number, the “b” represents the IP output number, and the “c” represents the IP input number.

188
◆ TRAP List
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.2 (mv3240IPTraps)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.2.2 (mv3240IPTrapsUnitStatus)
FAN ALARM status
1 mv3240IPFan1StatusTrap 1: normal mv3240IPFan1Status
2: abnormal
2 mv3240IPFan2StatusTrap Same as above mv3240IPFan2Status
3 mv3240IPFan3StatusTrap Same as above mv3240IPFan3Status
4 mv3240IPFan4StatusTrap Same as above mv3240IPFan4Status
5 mv3240IPFan5StatusTrap Same as above mv3240IPFan5Status
6 mv3240IPFan6StatusTrap Same as above mv3240IPFan6Status

11 mv3240IPPowerUnit1Statu Power unit 1 status

1: normal mv3240IPPowerUnit1Status
sTrap 2: abnormal
Power unit 2 status
mv3240IPPowerUnit2Statu 1: normal
12 sTrap 2: abnormal mv3240IPPowerUnit2Status
3: notInstalled * When MV-1640PS uninstalled.
Reference / Input / Ptp Lock status
21 mv3240IPGenlockStatusTr 1: locked mv3240IPGenlockStatus
ap 2: unlocked
3: holdover
Reference input format
1: noSignal ※MV-1640IF uninstalled
Fixed to noSignal
2: ntsc
mv3240IPGenlockFormatT 3: pal
22 rap mv3240IPGenlockFormat
4: format1080-59i
5: format1080-50i
6: format720-59p
7: format720-50p
8: unsupported
Unit status PtpLock signal format
24 mv3240IPPTPLockFormat 1: none mv3240IPPtpLockFormat
Trap 3: ptpDetect
Genlock type
25 mv3240IPGenlockTypeTra 1: referenceLock mv3240IPGenlockType
p 3: ptpLock
CLOCK1-4 LTC display status
1: normal - LTC normally input and displayed
31 mv3240IPLtc1StatusTrap 2: noSignal - No LTC input mv3240IPLtc1Status
3: normal-RTC - LTC normally input but not
displayed (RTC display
32 mv3240IPLtc2StatusTrap Same as above mv3240IPLtc2Status
33 mv3240IPLtc3StatusTrap Same as above mv3240IPLtc3Status
34 mv3240IPLtc4StatusTrap Same as above mv3240IPLtc4Status
MV-1640IP unit temperature status
1: normal
2: warning-85
3: warning-90
41 mv3240IPTempStatusTrap 4: warning-95 INTEGER
5: danger-100
6: danger-105
7: danger-110
8: danger-115
SNTP(Primary) communication status
1: disable
mv3240IPSntpPrimaryStat 2: ok
51 usTrap 3: com-err INTEGER
4: sync-err
5: over-err
52 mv3240IPSntpSecondaryS SNTP(Secondary) communication status INTEGER
tatusTrap Same as above

189
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.2.3 (mv3240IPTrapsOutputStatus)
HDMI Out format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
1 mv3240IPHdmiOutputFor 602: format720-59p mv3240IPHdmiOutputForma
matTrap 603: format720-50p t
920: format720x480-59p
921: format720x576-50p
1001: format2160-59p
1002: format2160-50p
SDI Out1 format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
202: format1080-59i
203: format1080-50i
2 mv3240IPSdiOutput1Form 602: format720-59p mv3240IPSdiOutput1Format
atTrap 603: format720-50p
1001: format2160-59p
1002: format2160-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
SDI Out2 format
102: format1080-59p
103: format1080-50p
mv3240IPSdiOutput2Form 202: format1080-59i
3 atTrap 203: format1080-50i mv3240IPSdiOutput2Format
Output video 602: format720-59p
status 603: format720-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
4 mv3240IPSdiOutput3Form SDI Out3 format mv3240IPSdiOutput3Format
atTrap Same as above
5 mv3240IPSdiOutput4Form SDI Out4 format mv3240IPSdiOutput4Format
atTrap Same as above
IP Out1 format
1: noStream
2: detail
102: format1080-59p
mv3240IPIpOutput1Forma 103: format1080-50p
6 tTrap 202: format1080-59i mv3240IPIpOutput1Format
203: format1080-50i
602: format720-59p
603: format720-50p
1011: format1080-59p-2si
1012: format1080-50p-2si
7 mv3240IPIpOutput2Forma IP Out2 format mv3240IPIpOutput2Format
tTrap Same as above
8 mv3240IPIpOutput3Forma IP Out3 format mv3240IPIpOutput3Format
tTrap Same as above
9 mv3240IPIpOutput4Forma IP Out4 format mv3240IPIpOutput4Format
tTrap Same as above
mv3240IPHdmiOutputHpd HDMI Out Hot Plug detection
11 Trap 1: unconnected mv3240IPHdmiOutputHpd
2: connected
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.2.4 (mv3240IPTrapsWindowStatus)
Window assign source no.
-1: none
Input video 1: notDisplay
11.x mv3240IPWindowVideoAs 101: Source01 mv3240IPWindowChannel,
status signTrap mv3240IPWindowAssign
|
132: Source32

190
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
Input format
-1: none
1: noSignal
2: unknown
0101: 1080-60p-LevelA
0102: 1080-59p-LevelA
0103: 1080-50p-LevelA
0104: 1080-60p-LevelB
0105: 1080-59p-LevelB
0106: 1080-50p-LevelB
0201: 1080-60i ( or 1080/30PsF)
0202: 1080-59i ( or 1080/29.97PsF)
0203: 1080-50i ( or 1080/25PsF)
0307: 1080-24psf
0308: 1080-23psf
0404: 1080-30p
0405: 1080-29p
0406: 1080-25p
0407: 1080-24p
0408: 1080-23p
0501: 1035-60i
0502: 1035-59i
0601: 720-60p mv3240IPWindowChannel,
mv3240IPWindowVideoFo 0602: 720-59p
12.x rmatTrap 0603: 720-50p mv3240IPWindowVideoForm
0607: 720-24p at
0608: 720-23p
0701: 525-60
0702: 625-50
1201: 2160-59p
1202: 2160-50p
1203: 2160-60p
1301: 1080-59p-LevelA-2SI
1305: 1080-50p-LevelA-2SI
1309: 1080-59p-LevelB-2SI
1313: 1080-50p-LevelB-2SI
1317: 1080-60p-LevelA-2SI
1321: 1080-60p-LevelB-2SI
1325: 1080-30p-LevelC-2SI
1329: 1080-29p-LevelC-2SI
1333: 1080-25p-LevelC-2SI
1337: 1080-24p-LevelC-2SI
1341: 1080-23p-LevelC-2SI
1404: 2160-30p
1405: 2160-29p
1406: 2160-25p
1407: 2160-24p
1408: 2160-23p
Video loss detection status
-1: none
mv3240IPWindowVideoLo 1: normal mv3240IPWindowChannel,
13.x ssTrap mv3240IPWindowVideoLoss
2: loss-A
3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B
Video freeze detection status
mv3240IPWindowVideoFr mv3240IPWindowChannel,
14.x -1: none mv3240IPWindowVideoFree
eezeTrap 1: normal ze
2: freeze
Video black level detection status mv3240IPWindowChannel,
15.x mv3240IPWindowVideoBl -1: none mv3240IPWindowVideoBlac
ackTrap 1: normal
2: black k
Video Luminance level detection status
mv3240IPWindowVideoLu -1: none mv3240IPWindowChannel,
16.x mv3240IPWindowVideoLum
mOverTrap 1: normal Over
2: luminanceOver
CRC error detection status
17.x mv3240IPWindowCrcError -1: none mv3240IPWindowChannel,
Trap 1: normal mv3240IPWindowCrcError
2: crcError
Audio loss detection status
-1: none
21.x mv3240IPWindowAudioLo 1: normal mv3240IPWindowChannel,
ssTrap 2: loss-A mv3240IPWindowAudioLoss
3: loss-B
4: loss-A-B
Input video Audio silence level detection status
status mv3240IPWindowAudioSil -1: none mv3240IPWindowChannel,
22.x mv3240IPWindowAudioSilen
enceTrap 1: normal ce
2: silence
Audio over level detection status mv3240IPWindowChannel,
mv3240IPWindowAudioLvl -1: none
23.x OverTrap 1: normal mv3240IPWindowAudioLvlO
2: levelOver ver

191
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
Closed caption loss detection status mv3240IPWindowChannel,
25.x mv3240IPWindowAnciCcL -1: none
1: normal mv3240IPWindowAnciCcLos
ossTrap s
Closed 2: loss
caption input
status Closed caption detection status
mv3240IPWindowAnciCcS -1: none mv3240IPWindowChannel,
26.x tsTrap 1: undetected mv3240IPWindowAnciCc
2: detected
Timecode loss detection status
Input -1: none mv3240IPWindowChannel,
mv3240IPWindowTimecod 1: normal
metadata 27.x eLossTrap 2: loss-A mv3240IPWindowTimecode
status 3: loss-B Loss
4: loss-A-B
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. 375.2.5 (mv3240IPTrapsIpStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPTrapsIpSfpStatus)
SFP module detection status
mv3240IPSfpPort,
11.a mv3240IPSfpModuleTrap 0: detected
mv3240IPSfpModule
1: undetected
Light output error detection status
mv3240IPSfpPort,
12.a mv3240IPSfpLightNgTxTr 0: normal
ap mv3240IPSfpLightNgTx
1: error
mv3240IPSfpLightLvTxTra Light output level error detection status mv3240IPSfpPort,
13.a
p Same as above mv3240IPSfpLightLvTx
mv3240IPSfpLightLossRx Light input detection status mv3240IPSfpPort,
SFP Status 14.a
Trap Same as above mv3240IPSfpLightLossRx
mv3240IPSfpLightLvRxTra Light input level error detection status mv3240IPSfpPort,
15.a
p Same as above mv3240IPSfpLightLvRx
Temperature error detection status mv3240IPSfpPort,
16.a mv3240IPSfpTempErrTrap
Same as above mv3240IPSfpTemp
Current error detection status mv3240IPSfpPort,
17.a mv3240IPSfpCurrErrTrap
Same as above mv3240IPSfpCurr
Voltage error detection status mv3240IPSfpPort,
18.a mv3240IPSfpVoltErrTrap
Same as above mv3240IPSfpVolt
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPTrapsIpMacStatus)
PHY link detection status
mv3240IPMacPort,
11.a mv3240IPMacLinkTrap 0: detected
mv3240IPMacLink
1: undetected
MAC/PHY data input error detection status
mv3240IPMacPort,
12.a mv3240IPMacPktRxTrap 0: normal
mv3240IPMacPktRx
1: error
mv3240IPMacFrmCrcRxTr MAC/PHY frame CRC error detection status mv3240IPMacPort,
MAC/PHY 13.a
ap Same as above mv3240IPMacFrmCrcRx
status
mv3240IPMacIpChksumTr MAC/PHY IP checksum error detection status mv3240IPMacPort,
14.a
ap Same as above mv3240IPMacIpChksum
MAC/PHY UDP checksum error detection
mv3240IPMacPort,
15.a mv3240IPMacUdpChksum status
Trap mv3240IPMacUdpChksum
Same as above
mv3240IPMacFrmBufOver MAC/PHY buffer over detection status mv3240IPMacPort,
16.a
Trap Same as above mv3240IPMacBufOverRx
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPTrapsIpPtpStatus)
PTP packets receive detection status
1 mv3240IPPtpPktRxTrap 0: detected mv3240IPPtpPktRx
1: undetected
PTP-Slave synchronization detection status
2 mv3240IPPtpSlvSyncTrap 0: normal mv3240IPPtpSlvSync
1: error
Hold Over detection status
mv3240IPPtpHoldOverTra
3 p 0: lock mv3240IPPtpHoldOver
1: unlock-hold over
4 mv3240IPPtpGmSelTrap ID of the selecting GM mv3240IPPtpGmSel
SFP port selection status of BC/TC-SW
PTP status 5 mv3240IPPtpSwSelTrap 0: sfpA mv3240IPPtpSwSel
1: sfpB
PTP packets receive detection status
11 mv3240IPPtpPktRx2Trap 0: detected mv3240IPPtpPktRx2
1: undetected
PTP-Slave synchronization detection status
mv3240IPPtpSlvSync2Tra
12 p 0: normal mv3240IPPtpSlvSync2
1: error
Hold Over detection status
13 mv3240IPPtpHoldOver2Tr 0: lock mv3240IPPtpHoldOver2
ap
1: unlock-hold over
14 mv3240IPPtpGmSel2Trap ID of the selecting GM mv3240IPPtpGmSel2

192
Object group OID MIB Trap Name Values OBJECTS
SFP port selection status of BC/TC-SW
15 mv3240IPPtpSwSel2Trap 0: sfpE mv3240IPPtpSwSel2
1: sfpF
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPTrapsIpEncStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1 (mv3240IPTrapsIpEncMainStatus)
IP output (Video/Main) overflow detection
status mv3240IPEncChMain,
11.b mv3240IPEncOvfVideoMai
nTrap 0: normal mv3240IPEncOvfVideoMain
Enc(Main) 1: error
status
IP output (Audio/Main) overflow detection mv3240IPEncChMain,
mv3240IPEncOvfAudioMai status
101.b nTrap
mv3240IPEncOvfAudioMain
Same as above
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].2 (mv3240IPTrapsIpEncSubStatus)
IP output (Video/Sub) overflow detection status mv3240IPEncChSub,
11.b mv3240IPEncOvfVideoSu
Enc(Sub) bTrap Same as above mv3240IPEncOvfVideoSub
status IP output (Audio/Sub) overflow detection status mv3240IPEncChSub,
101.b mv3240IPEncOvfAudioSu
bTrap Same as above mv3240IPEncOvfAudioSub
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPTrapsIpDecapStatus)
2 mv3240IPDecapMainTrap IP input (Main) Decap detection status mv3240IPDecapMain
Dec status
3 mv3240IPDecapSubTrap IP input (Sub) Decap detection status mv3240IPDecapSub
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPTrapsIpSdiiStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1 (mv3240IPTrapsIpSdiiMainStatus)
SDI input signal (Video/Main) detection status
for Encap mv3240IPSdiiChMain,
11.b mv3240IPSdiiLossVideoM mv3240IPSdiiLossVideoMai
ainTrap 0: normal
SDI input n
1: error
(Main) status
SDI input signal (Audio/Main) detection status mv3240IPSdiiChMain,
101.b mv3240IPSdiiLossAudioM for Encap mv3240IPSdiiLossAudioMai
ainTrap
Same as above n
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].2 (mv3240IPTrapsIpSdiiSubStatus)
SDI input signal (Video/Sub) detection status mv3240IPSdiiChSub,
mv3240IPSdiiLossVideoS for Encap
11.b ubTrap
mv3240IPSdiiLossVideoSub
SDI input Same as above
(Sub) status SDI input signal (Audio/Sub) detection status mv3240IPSdiiChSub,
mv3240IPSdiiLossAudioS for Encap
101.b ubTrap
Same as above mv3240IPSdiiLossAudioSub
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link] (mv3240IPTrapsIpSdioStatus)
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].1 (mv3240IPTrapsIpSdioMainStatus)
SDI output signal (Video/Main) detection status
after Decap mv3240IPSdioChMain,
11.c mv3240IPSdioLossVideoM mv3240IPSdioLossVideoMai
ainTrap 0: normal
n
1: error
SDI output signal (Audio/Main) detection status mv3240IPSdioChMain,
101.c mv3240IPSdioLossAudioM after Decap mv3240IPSdioLossAudioMai
SDI output ainTrap
Same as above n
(Main) status
SDI output signal (Audio Error/Main) detection
mv3240IPSdioChMain,
102.c mv3240IPSdioErrAudioMai status after Decap
nTrap mv3240IPSdioErrAudioMain
Same as above
SDI output signal (Meta/Main) detection status mv3240IPSdioChMain,
201.c mv3240IPSdioLossMetaM after Decap mv3240IPSdioLossMetaMai
ainTrap
Same as above n
OID: [Link].4.1.20175.1. [Link].2 (mv3240IPTrapsIpSdioSubStatus)
SDI output signal (Video/Sub) detection status
mv3240IPSdioChSub,
11.c mv3240IPSdioLossVideoS after Decap
ubTrap mv3240IPSdioLossVideoSub
Same as above
SDI output signal (Audio/Sub) detection status
mv3240IPSdioChSub,
101.c mv3240IPSdioLossAudioS after Decap
ubTrap mv3240IPSdioLossAudioSub
SDI output Same as above
(Sub) status SDI output signal (Audio Error/Sub) detection mv3240IPSdioChSub,
102.c mv3240IPSdioErrAudioSu status after Decap
bTrap mv3240IPSdioErrAudioSub
Same as above
SDI output signal (Meta/Sub) detection status mv3240IPSdioChSub,
mv3240IPSdioLossMetaS after Decap
201.c ubTrap
mv3240IPSdioLossMetaSub
Same as above
* The “x” represents the Window number.
* The “a” represents the SFP port number, the “b” represents the IP output number, and the “c” represents the IP input number.

193
Appendix 7. Ember+ Features
Refer to the table in the separate file: "MV-1640IP_MV-3240IP_Ember_plus-E-V1_8_0_SC.xls" for
details on Ember+ features.

Appendix 8. Input / Output Delay

Status Input/ Output delay
Delay SDIOut HDMIOut
Ref Lock FS Mode Input Format
Reduction 2SI(12G)/SQD 4K/2K
OFF 2/3 2/3
Field ALL
ON 1/2 1/2
1080i OFF 4/5 4/5
Synchronized
1080PsF ON 2/3 2/3
Frame
OFF 2/3 2/3
Other
ON 1/2 1/2
Field ALL - 1-2 / 2-3 1-2 / 2-3
Asynchronized 1080i/1080PsF - 2-4 / 3-5 2-4 / 3-5
Frame
Other - 1-2 / 2-3 1-2 / 2-3
Delay unit: field (16.6ms or 20ms)

194
Appendix 9. Using AUX Box as a Remote Control Unit
MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP can use HVS-AUX16A/32A/64A/16B/16C/16D as a remote control
unit.
The following listed numbers of actions are assignable.
Action number
AUX box type Action number
(with SHIFT key)
HVS-AUX16A/16B/16C/16D 16 32
HVS-AUX32A 32 64
HVS-AUX64A 64 --

Max. 4 AUX boxes can be connected.

9-1. Connection of AUX Box

Use LAN cable to connect AUX box to MV-1640IP/MV-3240.

◆ AUX ID Number
AUX box uses a unique ID from 1 to 255.
Use ID1 to 4 when connecting to an MV-1640IP/MV-3240/MV-3240IP. (Default: ID1)
When connecting multiple AUX boxes, use different IDs.

See “HVS-AUX16A/16B/16C/16D/32A/64A User Manual” enclosed with AUX Box for details of ID
setting.

1 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 2 GPI-IO 3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT

LTC REF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

OUTPUT
1 2 3 4
SER. NO.
12G/6G OPTION

LAN2 D C B A
12G/3G/HD-SDI 3G/HD-SDI HDMI LAN1 SFP+

MV-1640IP Rear Panel

Straight cable

LAN

Straight cable

HVS-AUX16A Rear Panel

HUB

9-2. Action Assignment to an AUX Box Button

Action Assignment to AUX box buttons can be done using Layout Manager or Web browser. See
the Layout Manager User Manual Sec. 5-12-7. “Remote (AUX Unit)” or the Web Browser User
Manual Sec. 2-2-3. “Action Assignment to a Button” for details.

195
Appendix 10. Example of NMOS REST API (ST2110)
Usage (MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP)
This chapter describes the procedure for changing the MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP receive stream (control
procedure).
MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP (hereafter called Receiver) supports NMOS IS-04, IS-05 REST API.
Refer to this page when you use a system other than NMOS RDS (Registration & Discovery System).
For details on the REST API you are using, see the corresponding NMOS API specifications.

◆ MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP
IP Address [Link] (Changeable)
NMOS port number 80
IS-04 NodeAPI v1.3
version ([Link]
IS-05 ConnectionAPI V1.1
version ([Link]

◆ Control procedure
For receiving stream settings of the Receiver, see “Appendix 10-1. Getting Receiver’s UUID List”
through “Appendix 10-4. Getting Receiver’s Settings”

196
10-1. Getting Receiver’s UUID List (MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP)
Receiver's Video, Audio and Meta data are independent and have their own UUID (Universally
Unique Identifier), which is necessary to change their settings. With this API, you can get the UUID
that the Receiver has.

GET [Link]

◆ Reply data
application/json
[
{
"controls": [
{
"href": "[Link]
"type": "urn:x-nmos:control:sr-ctrl/v1.0"
},
{
"href": "[Link]
"type": "urn:x-nmos:control:sr-ctrl/v1.1"
}
],
"description": "VoIP",
"id": "e8c1efa4-1014-5ea5-bf41-40fc69845ab1",
"label": "MV-1640IP_VoIP",
"node_id": "1dd00aa5-6b14-52c2-ad72-44db19d4a448",
"receivers": [
"e829871f-c125-5c8c-8f68-eb790f24b1f6", // Receiver1-Video
"0d5ea907-2192-5437-8977-91e586dd3e3f", // Receiver1-Audio
"6eaa20d2-3872-536e-b185-ce8fa611597e", // Receiver1-Meta
"805798d7-c827-58ac-9e1a-537ee531ebcd", // Receiver2-Video
"034fb40e-268f-5db1-85fa-25f2fdbe67ca", // Receiver2-Audio
"e00fe2ec-f2f7-5a0d-bf65-f6f06930847b", // Receiver2-Meta
・・・omission・・・
"8c26b7bc-1f05-560d-952c-ca76c1d942f3", // Receiver16-Video
"3c205ffd-6db4-5038-bfbd-9062d98f1e27", // Receiver16-Audio
"5aecf27e-04c3-5c86-ac0d-1b4e13385d80" // Receiver16-Meta
],
"senders": [],
"tags": {},
"type": "urn:x-nmos:device:pipeline",
"version": "1613644505:3729842"
}
]

IMPORTANT
- When MV-1640IP is set to ST2022, only UUIDs of Video can be obtained.
(obtainable: 16 UUIDs.)
- When MV-3240IP is set to ST2022, only UUIDs of Video can be obtained.
(obtainable: 32 UUIDs.)

197
10-2. Changing the Receive Stream Settings of a Single
Receiver (MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP)
PATCH [Link]

◆ Send data
application/json
{
"activation": {
"activation_time": null,
"mode": "activate_immediate"
},
"sender_id": null,
"transport_params": [
{
"destination_port": 51136,
"multicast_ip": "[Link]",
"rtp_enabled": true,
"source_ip": "[Link]"
},
{ // Redundant side
"destination_port": 51136,
"multicast_ip": "[Link]",
"rtp_enabled": true,
"source_ip": "[Link]"
}
]
}

◆ Replay data
application/json
(Same as “10-4. Getting Receiver’s Settings”)

198
10-3. Changing the Receive Stream Settings of Multiple
Receivers (MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP)
POST [Link]

◆ Send data
application/json
[
{
"id": "e829871f-c125-5c8c-8f68-eb790f24b1f6", // Receiver1-Video
"params": {
"activation": {
"activation_time": null,
"mode": "activate_immediate"
},
"sender_id": null,
"transport_params": [
{
"destination_port": 51136,
"multicast_ip": "[Link]",
"rtp_enabled": true,
"source_ip": "[Link]"
},
{ // Redundant side
"destination_port": 51136,
"multicast_ip": "[Link]",
"rtp_enabled": true,
"source_ip": "[Link]"
}
]
}
},
{
"id": "0d5ea907-2192-5437-8977-91e586dd3e3f", // Receiver1-Audio
"params": {
"activation": {
"activation_time": null,
"mode": "activate_immediate"
},
"sender_id": null,
"transport_params": [
{
"destination_port": 51200,
"multicast_ip": "[Link]",
"rtp_enabled": true,
"source_ip": "[Link]"
},
{ // Redundant side
"destination_port": 51200,
"multicast_ip": "[Link]",
"rtp_enabled": true,
"source_ip": "[Link]"
}
]
}

199
 },
{
"id": "6eaa20d2-3872-536e-b185-ce8fa611597e", // Receiver1-Meta
"params": {
"activation": {
"activation_time": null,
"mode": "activate_immediate"
},
"sender_id": null,
"transport_params": [
{
"destination_port": 51300,
"multicast_ip": "[Link]",
"rtp_enabled": true,
"source_ip": "[Link]"
},
{ // Redundant side
"destination_port": 51300,
"multicast_ip": "[Link]",
"rtp_enabled": true,
"source_ip": "[Link]"
}
]
}
}
]

◆ Reply data
application/json
[
{
"code": 200,
"id":"e829871f-c125-5c8c-8f68-eb790f24b1f6"
},
{
"code": 200,
"id":"0d5ea907-2192-5437-8977-91e586dd3e3f"
},
{
"code": 200,
"id":"6eaa20d2-3872-536e-b185-ce8fa611597e"
}
]

200
10-4. Getting Receiver’s Settings (MV-1640IP/MV-3240IP)
GET [Link]

◆ Replay data
application/json
{
"activation": {
"activation_time": null,
"mode": null,
"requested_time": null
},
"master_enable": true,
"sender_id": null,
"transport_file": {
"data": null,
"type": null
},
"transport_params": [
{
"destination_port": 51136,
"interface_ip": "[Link]",
"multicast_ip": "[Link]",
"rtp_enabled": true,
"source_ip": "[Link]"
},
{ // Redundant side
"destination_port": 51136,
"interface_ip": "[Link]",
"multicast_ip": "[Link]",
"rtp_enabled": true,
"source_ip": "[Link]"
}
]
}

201
Specifications and Dimensions
Unit Specifications
◆ MV-1640IP
Basic specifications
Temperature 0°C to 40°C

Humidity 30% to 90% (no condensation)

Power 100 V AC to 240 V AC ±10%, 50/60 Hz

Consumption 245 VA (235 W) at 100V AC to 120V AC

260 VA (222 W) at 200V AC to 240V AC

Dimensions 430 (W) x 44 (H) x 500 (D) mm EIA 1RU

480 (W) (Including rack mount brackets)

Weight 9.55 kg

Consumables Cooling fan: Replace every 5 years

(at 24-hour operation) Power Supply: Replace every 5 years

Technical specifications
Video format

IP signal ST2110-20 2160p / 59.94, 50

ST2022-7 (*9) 1080p / 59.94, 50
1080i / 59.94, 50
720p / 59.94, 50

ST2022-6 1080p / 59.94, 50

ST2022-7 (*9) 1080i / 59.94, 50
720p / 59.94, 50

SDI signal 4K 12G-SDI (*8) 2160p / 60, 59.94, 50

6G-SDI (*8) 2160p / 30, 29.97, 25, 24, 23.98

3G-SDI 1080p / 60, 59.94, 50 (Level-A/B)

Quad Link (Level-A/B)
1080p / 60, 59.94, 50
Dual Link (Level-A, Level-B DS, Level-B DL)
1080p / 30, 29.97, 25, 24, 23.98

2K HD-SDI 1080i / 60, 59.94, 50

1080p / 30, 29.97, 25, 24, 23.98
1080PsF / 30, 29.97, 25, 24, 23.98
720p / 60, 59.94, 50, 24, 23.98
1035i / 60, 59.94

SD SD-SDI 525/59.94i, 625/50i

Video input Supports IP and SDI inputs. (mixed and asynchronous inputs possible)

IP input SFP port A/B, C/D (SFP28): 25GBASE-SR Path redundant (ST2022-7) (*9)
ST2110-20: 2160p 4 streams or
1080p 16 streams or
1080i 16 streams or
720p 16 streams
ST2022-6: 1080p 14 streams or
1080i 16 streams or
720p 16 streams

202
 SDI input HD-BNC x 16 (3G/HD/SD-SDI x 16 or
(MV-1640SDI 3G/HD/SD-SDI x 8, 12G/6G-SDI x 8 (*8))
option and 12G-SDI: 12.0 Gbps (Up to L-4.5CHD 50 m)
MV-1640SDI-12G 6G-SDI: 6.0 Gbps (Up to L-4.5CHD 50 m)
option required) 3G-SDI: 3.0 Gbps (Up to 5C-FB 70 m)
HD-SDI: 1.5 Gbps (Up to 5C-FB 100 m)
SD-SDI: 270 Mbps (Up to 5C-2V 200 m)
10-bit YCbCr [Link]

Audio input

IP ST-2022-6 or ST2110-30 LevelB (16ch. Video synchronous)

Max 16 channels for each video: 48kHz / 24-bit

SDI embedded 48 kHz / 16-bit to 24-bit (Video synchronous)

Max 16 channels for each SDI input (group x 4) (*1)

LTC input BNC x1

(MV-1640IF option) SMPTE-compliant timecode: 1.0 Vp-p within ±6 dB

Video output

HDMI HDMI (Type-A):

1 output (4K in HDMI2.0 Level B mode)
Frame rate: 59.94fps, 50fps
10-bit YCbCr [Link], 8-bit YCbCr [Link] or 8-bit RGB [Link]
Limited range
Recommended cable length: 5m or less

12G/3G/HD-SDI Up to 3840 x 2160 (12G-SDI or 3G/HD-SDI) BNC x 1

1080p, 1080i, 1035i or 720p (3G/HD-SDI) HD-BNC x 3
10-bit YCbCr 4: 2: 2

IP SFP port A/B (SFP28): 25GBASE-SR Path redundancy (ST2022-7) (*9)

ST2110-20: 1080p 4 streams or
1080i 4 streams or
720p 4streams
ST2022: 1080p 4 streams or
1080i 4 streams or
720p 4streams

Audio output

SDI embedded Max 16 channels for each video (group x 4) 48kHz / 24-bit

HDMI embedded Max 8 channels for each video (stereo pair x 4) 48kHz / 24-bit

IP ST-2022-6 or ST2110-30 (Video synchronous)

Max 16 channels for each video 48kHz / 24-bit

Genlock input -REF IN (MV-1640IF option)

BB: 0.429 Vp-p (NTSC), 0.45 Vp-p (PAL) or Tri-level sync.: 0.6 Vp-p
75Ω BNC
-INPUT LOCK (SDI IN1 on MV-1640SDI option)
1080/59.94p, 1080/50p(Level-A/B), 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i,
720/59.94p, 720/50p, 525/60, 625/50
-PTP LOCK (SFP port A/B)

Video input/output HDMI/SDI output

delay (*2) <SDI1-4/HDMI Out>
0.5 frame (Field mode) Minimum value
1 frame (Frame mode) Minimum value

203
Video Window display 4K mode: 25 windows
Breakdown: 2K widow x 9, 1K window x 12
Video/Clock shared 2K window x 2
Video/Clock shared 1K window x 2

2K mode: 40 windows
Breakdown: 2K window x 8, 1K window x 23, 1K mirror window x 5
Video/Clock shared 2K window x 2
Video/Clock shared 1K window x 2

Clock Can be displayed in information window. (Internal clock or LTC is selectable for
Count up timer schedule timer.)
Count down timer (*3) Max. number: 4
Schedule timer

Background display Store and display background images

- [3840 x 2160] x 1 (4K layout mode)
- [1920 x 1080] x 4 (2K layout mode)

Logo display Store and display logo images

- Max: 1024 x 512 (Max. 8 logos can be registered. Max. 4 logos can be
displayed.)

Screen layout User customized layout

- Layouts for each output can be saved on the viewer up to 16 layouts.

Title display -Title length: Max. 16 characters x 4 lines for each input channel
-Supported characters:
Letters, numbers, symbols and Japanese kana/kanji (JIS 1 and 2)

Tally display Indicated as a frame (red/green/amber) or marker (red/green/amber) on each

input window.

Audio level display Up to 16 audio channels of audio level metering per input
(*7)

Time code display - Display for 12G/6G(*8)/3G/HD/SD-SDI ancillary timecode (ATC) (*4)
- Reader mode (*5)

Video monitoring Detects video loss, frozen frames, incorrect luminance/black level, and CRC
error.

Audio monitoring Detects audio loss, silence, and excessive audio levels.

Metadata monitoring Detects timecode loss error.

Control interface LAN1: 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, RJ-45 x 1

LAN2: Same as above

GPI-IO 50 pin D-sub (female) x1

(MV-1640IF -Up to 45-pin for input/ 23-pin for output (selectable, and can be used for input
option) and output)

Layout Manager Software for customizing window sizes and positions, switching windows , and
registering backgrounds and logos (Windows® software)

Live Viewer Software for video streaming and pre-alarm recording to a PC. (Windows®
software)

Data backup Stores settings internally to the memory (rewrite capacity: approx. 100,000
times) (*6)
Time information is held by a super capacitor.

Daytime accuracy Monthly difference within ±15 seconds.

Accuracy duration when power is off: 60 hours

204
 (*1) For 3G-SDI Level-B, only Link-A audio is supported, not Link-B.
(*2) Using interlaced input
(*3) Count up/down timer uses an internal crystal oscillator: ±50 ppm within operating temperature.
(0°C to 40°C)
(*4) Ancillary time code (ATC) is not passed through.
(*5) Time code from LTC input is not displayed.
(*6) Frequent setting changes may impair data retention.
(*7) When input audio frequency is under 60Hz, audio level may not be displayed correctly.
(*8) MV-1640-12G option required
(*9) The frequencies of IP input and MV output are different, the input signals are not properly processed.

◆ MV-3240
Basic Specifications
Temperature 0°C to 40°C

Humidity 30% to 90% (no condensation)

Power 100 V AC to 240 V AC ±10%, 50/60 Hz

Consumption 205 VA (197 W) at 100V AC to 120V AC

233 VA (189 W) at 200V AC to 240V AC

Dimensions 430 (W) x 44 (H) x 500 (D) mm EIA 1RU

480 (W) (Including rack mount brackets)

Weight 8.90 kg

Consumables Cooling fan: Replace every 5 years

(at 24-hour operation) Power Supply: Replace every 5 years

Technical specifications
Video format

SDI signal 4K 12G-SDI (*8) 2160p / 60, 59.94, 50

6G-SDI (*8) 2160p / 30, 29.97, 25, 24, 23.98

3G-SDI 1080p / 60, 59.94, 50 (Level-A/B)

Quad Link (Level-A/B)
1080p / 60, 59.94, 50
Dual Link (Level-A, Level-B DS, Level-B DL)
1080p / 30, 29.97, 25, 24, 23.98

2K HD-SDI 1080i / 60, 59.94, 50

1080p / 29.97, 25, 24, 23.98
1080PsF / 30, 29.97, 25, 24, 23.98
720p / 60, 59.94, 50, 24, 23.98
1035i / 60, 59.94

SD SD-SDI 525/59.94i, 625/50i

Video input Supports SDI 32 inputs (Asynchronous inputs are possible)

SDI input HD-BNC x 32 (3G/HD/SD-SDI x 32 or

(MV-1640SDI- 3G/HD/SD-SDI x 16, 12G/6G-SDI x 16 (*8))
12G option) 12G-SDI: 12.0 Gbps (Up to L-4.5CHD 50m) (*8)
6G-SDI: 6.0 Gbps (Up to L-4.5CHD 50m) (*8)
3G-SDI: 3.0 Gbps (Up to 5C-FB 70 m)
HD-SDI: 1.5 Gbps (Up to 5C-FB 100 m)
SD-SDI: 270 Mbps (Up to 5C-2V 200 m)
10-bit YCbCr [Link]

205
Audio input

SDI embedded 48 kHz / 16-bit to 24-bit (Video synchronous)

Max. 16 channels for each SDI input (group x 4) (*1)

LTC input BNC x1

(MV-1640IF option) SMPTE-compliant timecode: 1.0 Vp-p within ±6 dB

Video output

HDMI HDMI (Type-A):

1 output (4K in HDMI2.0 Level B mode)
Frame rate: 59.94fps, 50fps
10-bit YCbCr [Link], 8-bit YCbCr [Link] or 8-bit RGB [Link]
Limited range
Recommended cable length: 5m or less

12G/3G/HD- Up to 3840 x 2160 (12G-SDI or 3G/HD-SDI) BNC x 1

SDI 1080p, 1080i, 1035i or 720p (3G/HD-SDI) HD-BNC x 3
10-bit YCbCr 4: 2: 2

Audio output

Embedded Max 16 channels for each video (group x 4) 48kHz / 24-bit

(SDI)

Embedded Max 16 channels for each video (stereo pair x 4) 48kHz / 24-bit
(HDMI)

Genlock input -REF IN (MV-1640IF option)

BB: 0.429 Vp-p (NTSC), 0.45 Vp-p (PAL) or Tri-level sync.: 0.6 Vp-p
75Ω BNC
-INPUT LOCK (SDI IN1 only)
1080/59.94p, 1080/50p(Level-A/B), 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i,
720/59.94p, 720/50p, 525/60, 625/50

Video input/output HDMI/SDI output

delay (*2) <SDI1-4/HDMI Out>
0.5 frame (Field mode) Minimum value
1 frame (Frame mode) Minimum value

Video Window 4K mode: 25 windows

display Breakdown: 2K widow x 9, 1K window x 12
Video/Clock shared 2K window x 2
Video/Clock shared 1K window x 2
2K mode: 40 windows
Breakdown: 2K window x 8, 1K window x 23, 1K mirror window x 5
Video/Clock shared 2K window x 2
Video/Clock shared 1K window x 2

Clock Can be displayed in information window. (Internal clock or LTC is selectable for
Count up timer schedule timer.)
Count down timer Max. number: 4
(*3)
Schedule timer

Background display Store and display background images

- [3840 x 2160] x 1 (4K layout mode)
- [1920 x 1080] x 4 (2K layout mode)

Logo display Store and display logo images

- Max. size: 1024 x 512 (Max. 8 logos can be registered. Max. 4 logos can be
displayed.)

Screen layout User customized layout

- Layouts for each output can be saved on the viewer up to 16 layouts.

206
Title display -Title length: Max. 16 characters x 4 lines for each input channel
-Supported characters:
Letters, numbers, symbols and Japanese kana/kanji (JIS 1 and 2)

Tally display Indicated as a frame (red/green/amber) or marker (red/green/amber) on each input

window.

Audio level display Up to 16 audio channels of audio level metering per input
(*7)

Time code display - Display for 12G/6G(*8)/3G/HD/SD-SDI ancillary timecode (ATC) (*4)
- Reader mode (*5)

Video monitoring Detects video loss, frozen frames, incorrect luminance/black level, and CRC error.

Audio monitoring Detects audio loss, silence, and excessive audio levels.

Control Interface LAN1: 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, RJ-45 x 1

GPI-IO 50 pin D-sub (female) x1

(MV-1640IF up to 45-pin for input/ 23-pin for output (selectable, and can be used for input and
option) output)

Layout Manager Software for customizing window sizes and positions, switching windows , and
registering backgrounds and logos (Windows® software)

Live Viewer Software for video streaming and pre-alarm recording to a PC. (Windows®
software)

Data backup Stores settings internally to the memory (rewrite capacity: approx. 100,000 times)
(*6)
Time information is held by a super capacitor.

Daytime accuracy Monthly difference within ±15 seconds

Accuracy duration when power is off: 60 hours

(*1) For 3G-SDI Level-B, only Link-A audio is supported, not Link-B.
(*2) Using interlaced input
(*3) Count up/down timer uses an internal crystal oscillator: ±50 ppm within operating temperature.
(0°C to 40°C)
(*4) Ancillary time code (ATC) is not passed through.
(*5) Time code from LTC input is not displayed.
(*6) Frequent setting changes may impair data retention.
(*7) When input audio frequency is under 60Hz, audio level may not be displayed correctly.
(*8) MV-1640-12G option required

207
◆ MV-3240IP
Basic specifications
Temperature 0°C to 40°C

Humidity 30% to 90% (no condensation)

Power 100 V AC to 240 V AC ±10%, 50/60 Hz

Consumption 196 VA (190 W) at 100V AC to 120V AC

229 VA (183 W) at 200V AC to 240V AC

Dimensions 430 (W) x 44 (H) x 500 (D) mm EIA 1RU

480 (W) (Including rack mount brackets)

Weight 9.25 kg

Consumables Cooling fan: Replace every 5 years

(at 24-hour operation) Power Supply: Replace every 5 years

Technical specifications
Video format

IP signal ST2110-20 2160p / 59.94, 50

1080p / 59.94, 50
1080i / 59.94, 50
720p / 59.94, 50

ST2022-6 1080p / 59.94, 50

1080i / 59.94, 50
720p / 59.94, 50

Video input Supports IP inputs.

IP input SFP port A/B, C/D, E/F and G/H (SFP28): 25GBASE-SR
Path redundant (ST2022-7) (*6)
ST2110-20: 2160p 8 streams or
1080p 32 streams or
1080i 32 streams or
720p 32 streams
ST2022-6: 1080p 28 streams or
1080i 32 streams or
720p 32 streams

Audio input

IP ST-2022-6 or ST2110-30 LevelB (16ch. Video synchronous)

Max 16 channels for each video: 48kHz / 24-bit

LTC input BNC x1

(MV-1640IF option) SMPTE-compliant timecode: 1.0 Vp-p within ±6 dB

Video output

HDMI HDMI (Type-A):

1 output (4K in HDMI2.0 Level B mode)
Frame rate: 59.94fps, 50fps
10-bit YCbCr [Link], 8-bit YCbCr [Link] or 8-bit RGB [Link]
Limited range
Recommended cable length: 5m or less

12G/3G/HD-SDI Up to 3840 x 2160 (12G-SDI or 3G/HD-SDI) BNC x 1

1080p, 1080i, 1035i or 720p (3G/HD-SDI) HD-BNC x 3
10-bit YCbCr 4: 2: 2

208
 IP SFP port A/B (SFP28): 25GBASE-SR Path redundancy (ST2022-7) (*6)
ST2110-20: 1080p 4 streams or
1080i 4 streams or
720p 4streams
ST2022: 1080p 4 streams or
1080i 4 streams or
720p 4 streams

Audio output

SDI embedded Max 16 channels for each video (group x 4) 48kHz / 24-bit

HDMI embedded Max 8 channels for each video (stereo pair x 4) 48kHz / 24-bit

IP ST-2022-6 or ST2110-30 (Video synchronous)

Max 16 channels for each video 48kHz / 24-bit

Genlock input -REF IN (MV-1640IF option)

BB: 0.429 Vp-p (NTSC), 0.45 Vp-p (PAL) or Tri-level sync.: 0.6 Vp-p
75Ω BNC
-PTP LOCK (SFP port A/B)

Video input/output HDMI/SDI output

delay (*1) <SDI1-4/HDMI Out>
0.5 frame (Field mode) Minimum value
1 frame (Frame mode) Minimum value

Video Window display 4K mode: 25 windows

Breakdown: 2K widow x 9, 1K window x 12
Video/Clock shared 2K window x 2
Video/Clock shared 1K window x 2

2K mode: 40 windows
Breakdown: 2K window x 8, 1K window x 23, 1K mirror window x 5
Video/Clock shared 2K window x 2
Video/Clock shared 1K window x 2

Clock Can be displayed in information window. (Internal clock or LTC is selectable for
Count up timer schedule timer.)
Count down timer (*2) Max. number: 4
Schedule timer

Background display Store and display background images

- [3840 x 2160] x 1 (4K layout mode)
- [1920 x 1080] x 4 (2K layout mode)

Logo display Store and display logo images

- Max: 1024 x 512 (Max. 8 logos can be registered. Max. 4 logos can be
displayed.)

Screen layout User customized layout

- Layouts for each output can be saved on the viewer up to 16 layouts.

Title display -Title length: Max. 16 characters x 4 lines for each video window.
-Supported characters:
Letters, numbers, symbols and Japanese kana/kanji (JIS 1 and 2)

Tally display Indicated as a frame (red/green/amber) or marker (red/green/amber) on each

input window.

Audio level display (*5) Up to 16 audio channels of audio level metering per input

Time code display Not supported (*3)

Video monitoring Detects video loss, frozen frames, incorrect luminance/black level, and CRC
error.

Audio monitoring Detects audio loss, silence, and excessive audio levels.

209
Metadata monitoring Detects timecode loss error.

Control interface LAN1: 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T, RJ-45 x 1

LAN2: Same as above

GPI-IO 50 pin D-sub (female) x1

(MV-1640IF -Up to 45-pin for input/ 23-pin for output (selectable, and can be used for input
option) and output)

Layout Manager Software for customizing window sizes and positions, switching windows , and
registering backgrounds and logos (Windows® software)

Live Viewer Software for video streaming and pre-alarm recording to a PC. (Windows®
software)

Data backup Stores settings internally to the memory (rewrite capacity: approx. 100,000
times) (*4)
Time information is held by a super capacitor.

Daytime accuracy Monthly difference within ±15 seconds.

Accuracy duration when power is off: 60 hours

(*1) Using interlaced input

(*2) Count up/down timer uses an internal crystal oscillator: ±50 ppm within operating temperature.
(0°C to 40°C)
(*3) Time code from LTC input is not displayed.
(*4) Frequent setting changes may impair data retention.
(*5) When input audio frequency is under 60Hz, audio level may not be displayed correctly.
(*6) The frequencies of IP input and MV output are different, the input signals are not properly processed.

210
External Dimensions
◆ MV-1640IP

(All dimensions in mm.)

SFP+ LAN2 LAN1 HDMI 3G/HD-SDI 12G/3G/HD-SDI
A B C D

SER. NO.
12G/6G OPTION
4 3 2 1
OUTPUT
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

8 7 6 4 5 3 2 1 REF LTC
3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT GPI-IO 2 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 1

500
2.3
6

POWER 1
AUTO ALL OUT IP/SDI USER1

POWER 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-1640IP
44
32

FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER

/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2
6

430
462
480

211
◆ MV-3240
LAN1 HDMI 3G/HD-SDI 12G/3G/HD-SDI
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 OPTION

SER. NO.
12G/6G

LOWER
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
4 3 2 1
OUTPUT
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 OPTION
12G/6G

UPPER
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 REF LTC
3G/HD/SD-SDI INPUT
GPI-IO 2 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 1

500 28.8
2.3
6

POWER 1 1-16
AUTO ALL OUT /17-32 USER1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-3240
44

POWER 2
FULL ENTER
32

/MULTI OUT1 OUT2 USER2 (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)

FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2
6

430
462
480

212
◆ MV-3240IP
SFP+ LAN1 HDMI 3G/HD-SDI 12G/3G/HD-SDI
)
A B C D E F G H
LAN2

SER. NO.
4 3 2 1
OUTPUT

2 AC100-240V 50/60Hz IN 1

500
2.3
6

POWER 1 1-16
AUTO ALL OUT /17-32 USER1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MV-3240IP
44

POWER 2
32

FULL OUT1 OUT2 USER2 ENTER

/MULTI (MUTE) (LOCK) (TEST)
FAN
ALARM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 VIDEO OUT3 OUT4 USER3 MENU
REF LOCK /AUDIO
POWER 1 POWER 2
6

430
462

480

213
 Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
 FOR-A COMPANY LIMITED
3-8-1 Ebisu, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 150-0013, Japan
[Link] Tel: +81(0)3-3446-3936 Fax: +81(0)3-3445-5116